engineering hydrology - falmatasaba · preface this teaching material has been compiled from...

287
Engineering Hydrology Picture Here Yilma Seleshi (Dr.) April 2005

Upload: others

Post on 16-Mar-2020

36 views

Category:

Documents


15 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Engineering

Hydrology

Picture Here

Yilma Seleshi (Dr.)

April 2005

Page 2: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

PREFACE

This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil

Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate students in the Department of Civil Engineering,

Addis Ababa University over the last seven years (1997-2004). The teaching material largely

follows the style and content of two standard text books in hydrology. The first text book is the

Prof. Ven Te Chow, David R. Maidment & Larry W. Mays Applied Hydrology and the second

text book is the Prof. Victor Miguel Ponce Engineering Hydrology, Principles and Practices.

Where possible, relevant examples based on Ethiopian rainfall and rivers data are given. Project

type examples taken from the practice in Ethiopia are also given in the Annexes in order to

illustrate the integrated nature of the hydrology study and problem solving is site specific.

The teaching material is broadly composed of 12 chapters dealing with different aspects of

hydrology. The first chapter introduces hydrology and hydrological cycle. The second chapter

discusses rainfall causes and measurements. The third chapter deals with evaporation from lakes

and evapotranspiration. The fourth chapter discusses infiltration as process and its measurements.

Streamflow measurement and hydrographs are discussed in chapter five Hydrology of small and

mid size watersheds are discussed in chapter six and seven respectively. Presentation on river

routing and reservoir routing are given in chapter eight and nine respectively. Hydorlogic

statistics and frequency analysis are given in chapter 11. Finally, chapter 12 briefly discusses the

basics of groundwater hydrology.

Practicing water resources engineers may find the teaching material useful although its main

target is to the undergraduate civil engineering student and to some extent to the postgraduate

students. The Author would very much appreciate receiving comments from students and other

users which improves the content and the style of this teaching material.

Page 3: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

I am grateful to the Addis Ababa University Vice President for Research and Graduate Programs

office for financing the preparation of this teaching material. I would like to express my

appreciation to my wife W/o Hanna Berhanu for her encouragement and support in preparation of

this teaching material.

Page 4: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Definition of Hydrology ........................................................................................ 1

1.2 Development of Hydrology.................................................................................... 2

1.3 Hydrological Cycle .......................................................................................... 3

1.4 Practice problems .................................................................................................. 8

2 RAINFALL ................................................................................................................. 9

2.1. Causes of rainfall over Ethiopia ....................................................................... 9

2.1.1. General circulation of the global atmosphere ............................................ 9

2.1.2 Formation of the Intertropical Convergence Zone ......................................... 13

2.1.3 The African sector of ITCZ and the associated rainfall ................................ 14

2.1.4 Ethiopian rainfall climate ............................................................................ 16

2.2 The physics of rainfall formation ................................................................... 19

2.2 The physics of rainfall formation ................................................................... 20

2.3 Estimation of Precipitable Water .................................................................... 21

2.4 Measurement of rainfall and optimum number of rain guages ....................... 22

2.5 Estimating missing rainfall data ..................................................................... 24

2.6 Point rainfall analysis and classification of storms ......................................... 29

2.6.1 Point rainfall analysis .................................................................................. 29

2.6.2 Storm temporal pattern classification........................................................... 30

2.7 Estimation of average depth of rainfall over a catchment ............................... 31

2.7.1 Changing point rainfall to area rainfall .......................................................... 31

2.7.2 The arithmetic mean method .................................................................. 32

2.7.3 The Thiessen polygon method ............................................................... 33

2.7.4 The isohyetal method ................................................................................... 33

2.9 Intensity-duration-frequency curves .................................................................... 35

2.10 Double mass analysis ......................................................................................... 37

2.12 Practice Problems .............................................................................................. 46

3. EVAPORATION....................................................................................................... 49

3.1 Definition of some meteorological variables .................................................. 49

3.2.1 Measurements of air and soil temperatures ............................................. 58

3.2.2 Sunshine recorder .................................................................................. 58

3.2.3 Wind speed and direction recorder ........................................................ 60

3.2.4. Dew point temperature measurement ........................................................... 61

3.2.5 Measurement of evaporation and evapotranspiration .................................... 61

3.3 Methods for estimating potential evaporation ................................................. 64

3.3.1 The energy balance method ................................................................... 64

3.3.2. Aerodynamic method ................................................................................... 69

3.3.3. Combined aerodynamic and energy balance method - the combination

method: ................................................................................................................. 71

3.4 Evapotranspiration ......................................................................................... 72

3.5. Analysis of the homogeneity of meteorological data series.................................. 73

3.6 Practice Problems ................................................................................................ 75

4. Infiltration ............................................................................................................... 77

4.1 Factors affecting infiltration .......................................................................... 77

4.2 Measurements of infiltration .......................................................................... 80

4.2.1 Areal measurement ...................................................................................... 80

Page 5: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

4.2.2 Point measurement ........................................................................................ 80

4.3 Estimating infiltration rate ................................................................................. 82

4.3.1 Horton infiltration ........................................................................................ 82

4.3.2 The -index method ................................................................................... 85

4.3.3 The Phillip method ....................................................................................... 85

4.3.4* The Green-Ampt method ........................................................................... 86

4.4. Practice Problems .............................................................................................. 93

5. STREAMFLOW MEASUREMENTS and HYDROGRAPH ................................. 94

5.1 Stream gauging site selection ......................................................................... 94

5.1.1 Selection of gauging site ............................................................................. 95

5.2 Stage measurement ............................................................................................. 97

5.2.1 Manual gauge ............................................................................................... 97

5.2.1 Recording gauge .......................................................................................... 98

5.3 Flow velocity measurement and discharge computation .................................... 102

5.4 Dilution gauging .......................................................................................... 107

5.4.1 Sudden Injection method ............................................................................ 107

5.4.2 Continuous and constant rate injection method ........................................... 109

5.5 The slope-area method ...................................................................................... 110

5.6 Orifice formula for bridge opening ............................................................... 114

5.7 Stage discharge relationship - rating curve ........................................................ 117

5.9 Hydrograph separation ...................................................................................... 125

5.10. Practice problems........................................................................................... 128

6. Watershed properties .............................................................................................. 129

6.1 Watershed area ................................................................................................. 129

6.2 Watershed shape .............................................................................................. 130

6.3 Watershed relief ................................................................................................ 131

7 Hydrology of small watersheds ................................................................................ 150

7.1 The rational method ......................................................................................... 150

7.1.1 Determination of tc ............................................................................... 151

7.1.2 Estimation of runoff coefficient C .............................................................. 152

7.1.3 Composite watershed ................................................................................. 153

7.2 Application of the rational method to storm-sewer and culvert size design ... 156

7.2.1 Design of storm sewer ................................................................................ 156

7.3 Practice problems: ........................................................................................... 164

8. Hydrology of midsize watersheds .......................................................................... 166

8.1 The SCS method........................................................................................ 166

8.1.1 SCS Peak discharge and flood hydrograph determination ..................... 168

8.2. The Unit Hydrograph Method ...................................................................... 175

8.2.1 Derivation of unit hydrographs ............................................................. 175

8.3 S- hydrograph ................................................................................................. 181

8.4 Synthetic unit hydrograph ........................................................................... 182

8.5 Instantaneous Geomorphologic Unit Hydrograph............................................... 188

8.6 Practice problems: ............................................................................................ 191

9. River Routing ....................................................................................................... 195

9.1 The Muskingum Method .............................................................................. 196

9.2 Practice problems .............................................................................................. 203

Page 6: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

10. Reservoir Routing ................................................................................................. 204

10.1. Level pool or reservoir routing using storage indication or modified pulse

method .................................................................................................................... 205

10.1.2 Reservoir routing with controlled outflow ................................................ 211

10.2 Practice problems........................................................................................... 213

11 Frequency Analysis ............................................................................................... 214

11.1 Concepts of statistics and probability ........................................................... 214

11.1.1 Frequency and probability functions. .................................................... 217

11.3 Statistical parameters ............................................................................... 221

11.4 Fitting data to a probability distribution........................................................ 223

11.5. Common probabilistic models ........................................................................ 226

11.5.1 The Binomial distribution......................................................................... 227

11.5.2 The exponential distribution: .................................................................... 229

11.5.3 Extreme value distribution ...................................................................... 230

11.5.4 Frequency Analysis using Frequency Factor............................................. 235

11.6 Probability plot ........................................................................................ 240

11.7. Testing for outliers .................................................................................. 242

11.8 Practice problems............................................................................................ 244

12. BASICS OF GROUNDWATER HYDROLOGY .............................................. 246

12.1 Introduction ................................................................................................. 246

12.2 Properties of Groundwater ............................................................................... 246

12.3 Groundwater movement ................................................................................... 251

12.3.1 Darcy’s law .......................................................................................... 251

12.3.2 Hydraulic conductivity K ......................................................................... 253

12.3.3 Specific storage and specific yield ............................................................. 256

12.3.4 Transmissivity and storage coefficient. ...................................................... 258

12.4. Determination of hydraulic conductivity in laboratory. ................................... 258

12.5. Flow nets ........................................................................................................ 260

12.6 Unconfined steady state flow: Depuit Assumption .......................................... 264

12.7 Steady-state well hydraulics ............................................................................ 268

Page 7: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

List of Tables

Table 0-1: Main synoptic features affecting Ethiopian rainfall (summarized from Babu,

2002). .................................................................................................................... 17

Table 0-2. Recommended minimum densities of meteorological network as applied for

the different physiographic unit of a river basin (WMO, 1994). ............................. 24

Table 0-3: Rain gage chart analysis ........................................................................ 30

Table 0-4. Generalized design criteria - return period- for water-control structures ...... 35

Table 5-1.Recommended minimum density of hydrometric stations .............................. 95

Table 5-2. Values of Co and e in the orifice formula, L = Width of waterway, and W

=unobstructed width of the stream as defined in Figure 5.9: ................................. 114

Page 8: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Figure 1-1a: The hydrological cycle with major components (Ponce, 1989) ..................... 3

Figure 0-1. In general, the amount of solar energy absorbed by the Earth at each latitude

differs from the amount of terrestrial radiation emitted at the same latitude and so

energy has to be transferred from equatorial to polar region (after Burroughs,

1991). .................................................................................................................... 10

Figure 0-2. Hadley circulation: a vigorous upward branch in the tropics, fed by low-level

convergence of moist air flowing over the warm sea and driven by the latent heat

released from the "hot towers" of cumulo-nimbus clouds. The flow from these

cumulus towers can extend to the lower stratosphere, whence there is upper level

divergence as the air streams towards the sub-tropics. Under the action of radiative

cooling to space, this air sinks in the region of the sub-tropical high pressure

systems, thus completing the overall circulation (after Bonnel et al., 1993). ........... 11

Figure 0-3. The position of the ITCZ ( Inter tropical front in some zones) in February and

August (after Barry and Chorley, 1982). ................................................................ 12

Figure 0-4. The meso-scale and synoptic structure of the Intertropical Convergence Zone

(ITCZ), showing a model of the spatial distribution (above) and of the vertical

structure (below) of the convective elements which form the cloud clusters (from

Mason, 1970) ......................................................................................................... 13

Figure 0-5. map of mean annual African rainfall (mm) for approximately 1920 -73

showing the position of the Intertropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ) in July and

January; (b) map of the long-term average winds near the surface in July over and

near Africa (after Folland et al., 1991). ................................................................. 15

Figure 0-6. Schematic diagram of the structure of air masses over western Africa and the

rainfall process in the Sahel region (after Beran and Rodier, 1985). ...................... 16

Figure 0-7. Mean annual isohyetal map of Ethiopia (mm) ............................................ 19

Figure 0-8. Water droplets in clouds are formed by nucleation of vapor on aerosols, then

go through many condensation-evaporation cycle as they circulate in the cloud, until

they aggregate into large enough drops to fall through the cloud base (Chow, 1988).

.............................................................................................................................. 20

Figure 0-9. This diagram illustrates two commonly used non-recording instruments, the

standard BritishMeteorological Office gauge (A) and the U.S. Weather Bureau

standard gauge (B); a Nipher type gauge shield and a wire gauge cylinder which

can be used to assess horizontal interception (D). The construction and principle of

operation of three recording instruments is also shown along with an example of the

chart produced by a tilting-siphon-recording gauge. ............................................. 28

Figure 0-10. Rain gage chart from a rain gage of the reversible, recording type. .... 29

Figure 0-11: Typical rainfall intensity pattern ................................................................ 30

Figure 0-12. Depth-area, or area-reduction, curves. ..................................................... 32

Figure 5-1: Typical streamflow gauging station installed in the Wabi river near Dodola

town upstream of the Melkawakana reservoir (February 2002). ............................. 97

Figure 5-2. The measurement of stage through manual methods and recording

instruments (after Gregory and Walling, 1973) ...................................................... 99

Figure 5-3: A typical chart from vertical float recorder. .......................................... 101

Figure 5-4: Vertical and horizontal axis current meters and wading rod and cable

suspension mounting of the meter body. .............................................................. 102

Page 9: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Figure 5-5: Top: current meter mounted on a measuring rod, (bottom) suspended on a

cable from the bow of a jet-boat. Wide rivers flow (usually greater than 100 m) are

often measured using a boat- the Baro river near Sudan border is the case in

Ethiopia. .............................................................................................................. 103

Figure 5-6. The velocity area technique of discharge measurements: a cable way is used

on large streams for positioning the current meter in the verticals and a special cable

drum can be used to obtain accurate readings of depth and spacing of verticals. The

mean section and mid-section methods are commonly used to compute the discharge

of the individual segments. .................................................................................. 105

Figure 5-7. Dilution gauging: constant rate injection and gulp injection. .................... 108

Figure 5-8. Definition sketch of the orifice formula ..................................................... 116

Figure 5-9. Rating curves in linear (Top) and logarithmic scale of Zarema river near

Zarema, a tributary of Tekeze river (MWR).. ....................................................... 117

Figure 5-10 Daily discharge hydrographs for Wabi Shebele river at Melka Wakana for

the year 1969. ...................................................................................................... 120

Figure 5-11. Separation of sources of streamflow on an idealized hydrograph , (b) sources

of streamflow on a hillslope profile during a dry period, (c) and during a rainfall

event, (d) the extent of a stream network during a dry period, (e) and during a

rainfall event. ....................................................................................................... 123

Figure 5-12. Baseflow separation techniques (Chow et al. 1988). ................................ 126

Page 10: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

INTRODUCTION 1 ___________________________________________________________________________

1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Definition of Hydrology

Hydrology is a multidisciplinary subject that deals with the occurrence,

circulation and distribution of the waters of the Earth. In other words,

hydrology is the study of the location and movement of inland water, both

frozen and liquid, above and below ground. The domain of hydrology

embraces the physical, chemical, and biological reaction of water in natural

and manmade environment (Chow et al, 1988).

Hydrology is applied to major civil engineering projects such as irrigation

schemes, dams and hydroelectric power, and in planning water supply

projects. Hydrological information is essential in:

(1) Estimating reservoir storage capacity that is needed to ensure adequate water

supplies for municipal, irrigation and hydropower needs.

(2) Planning water resources projects the peak discharge and its volume of flood

that have to be adopted in design of irrigation, hydropower, and flood control

projects. If the selected flood is too high, it results in a conservative and

unnecessary costly structures while adoption of a low design flood can result

in the loss of the structure itself and devastating damage to downstream

residence and properties.

(3) Estimating the impact of watershed management on the quantity and quality of

the surface and the groundwater resources.

(4) Planning an integrated water resources development master plan for a basin.

(5) Trans-boundary river water allocation problems, and

(6) Delineation of a probable flood levels to plan a protection of settlements and

projects from flooding or to promote better zoning.

Page 11: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

INTRODUCTION 2 ___________________________________________________________________________

1.2 Development of Hydrology

From the very beginning mankind attempted to utilize the precious water

resources of the Earth in a thoughtful way. History tells us that Samaritans and

Egyptians along the Nile Delta, Chinese along the banks of the Hwang - Ho

and Aztecs in South America applied detailed methods for their water

resources management (Shaw, 1994).

The Greek philosophers were the first students of hydrology, with Aristotle

proposing the conversion of moist air into water deep inside mountains as the

source of springs and streams. Homer suggested the idea of an underground

sea as the source of all surface waters.

During the Renaissance, a gradual change occurred from purely philosophical

concepts of hydrology toward observational science. Leonardo da Vinci

(1452-1519) made the first systematic studies of velocity distribution in

streams using a weighted rod held afloat by an inflated bladder. The rod would

be released at a point in the stream, and Leonardo would walk along the bank

marking its progress with an odometer and judging the difference between the

surface and the bottom velocities by the inclination of the rod. Later the

Frenchman, Pierre Perrault (1608-1680), measured surface runoff and found it

to be only a fraction of rainfall.

The year 1850 might be regarded as marking the beginning of the

development of methods in current use in hydrological practice. In 1851,

Mulvaney first described the concept of time of concentration that now forms

the backbone of the rational method of runoff computation, and he also

designed primitive form of rain-gauge that would record time-varying rainfall

intensity during a storm. Five years later Darcy established the basic law of

groundwater motion.

During the following decades, knowledge gradually accumulated: in 1871

Saint Venant derived the equations of one-dimensional surface water flow, in

1891 Manning developed his equation for open channel velocity, in 1908 the

first watershed level measurement of the hydrologic effects of the land-use

change was done, in 1911 Green and Ampt produced their infiltration model,

and in 1925 Streeter and Philps developed the dissolved oxygen sag curve for

rivers.

Page 12: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

INTRODUCTION 3 ___________________________________________________________________________ The period from 1930 to 1950 produced a significant step forward in the field

of hydrology as government agencies especially in USA began to develop

their own programs of hydrologic research. Sherman’s 1933 unit hydrograph,

Horton’s 1933 infiltration theory, and Theis’s 1935 nonequilibrium equation

in well hydraulics advanced the state of art significantly. Gumbel 1958

proposed the use of extreme value distribution for frequency analysis of

hydrological data laying a ground for modern statistical hydrology

(Maidement 1993).

1.3 Hydrological Cycle

Water on earth exists in a space called the hydrosphere that extends about 15

km up into the atmosphere and about 1 km down into the lithosphere, the crust

of the earth. Water circulation in the hydrosphere through numerous paths

forms the hydrological cycle. It can be said that the hydrological cycle has no

beginning or end and its main processes occur continuously.

Figure 1-1a: The hydrological cycle with major components (Ponce, 1989)

Page 13: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

INTRODUCTION 4 ___________________________________________________________________________

Figure 1.1b. The hydrological cycle with major components (another perspective)

Page 14: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

INTRODUCTION 5 ___________________________________________________________________________

Table 1.1: Estimate of the world’s water (Maidement, 1993).

Volume (10 6 km

3 )

Percentage of total

water

Ocean

1370.00

96.50

Groundwater

Fresh

Saline

10.53

12.87

0.76

0.93

Ice sheet and glaciers

24.00

1.65

Lakes:

Fresh

Saline

0.0910

0.0850

0.0070

0.0060

Soil moisture

Biological water

0.0160

0.0012

0.0015

0.0001

Rivers

Marshes

0.0021

0.0110

0.0002

0.0008

Atmospheric vapor

0.0130

0.0010

Table 1.1 gives the relative quantities of the earth’s water contained in each of

the phases of the hydrological cycle. The oceans contain 96.5 % of the earth’s

water, and of the 3.5 % on land, approximately 1% is contained in deep, saline

groundwater or in saline lakes, leaving only 2.5 % of the earth’s water as fresh

water that is 35 million cubic kilometer. Of this fresh water, 68.6% is frozen

into the polar ice caps and a further 30.1 % is contained in shallow aquifers,

leaving only 1.3% of the of the earth’s fresh water mobile in the surface and

atmospheric phases of the hydrological cycle.

The driving force of the circulation is derived from the radiant energy received

from the Sun. The largest atmospheric moisture sources of the earth are

Pacific, Atlantic and Indian oceans. Heating of ocean surface causes

evaporation, the transfer of water from the liquid to the gaseous state, to form

part of the atmosphere, then the water vapor changes back to the liquid again

through the process of condensation to form clouds and, with favorable

atmospheric conditions, precipitation (rain or hail) is produced either to

Page 15: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

INTRODUCTION 6 ___________________________________________________________________________ return directly to the ocean storage or to the land surface. Snow may

accumulate in polar regions or on high mountains and consolidate into ice.

In more temperate lands, rainfall may be intercepted by vegetation from

which the intercepted water may return at once to the air by evaporation.

Remaining rainfall reaching the ground may collect to form surface runoff or

it may infiltrate into the ground. The liquid water in the soil then percolates

through the unsaturated layers to reach the water table where the ground soil

stratum becomes saturated, or it is taken up by vegetation from which it may

be transpired back into the atmosphere. The surface runoff and base flow

forming stream-flow or river-flow flows into lakes, swamps, or seas, or

oceans.

An example of marco-hydrological cycle of the Ethiopian part of the Nile

basin is described as follows. Part of rainfall collected over western Ethiopia is

destined to the Mediterranean sea through the Baro, Akobo, Blue Nile and

Atbara rivers. Mediterranean sea is connected to the Atlantic Ocean and to the

Indian Ocean via the Red Sea. Clouds formed from the moisture evaporated

form the Atlantic and Indian Ocean will come back as rainfall over Ethiopian

highlands to complete a micro hydrological cycle.

It appears that the concept of hydrologic cycle is simple, but the phenomenon

is enormously complex and intricate. It is not just one large cycle but rather is

composed of many interrelated cycles of continental, regional, and local

extent. Moreover, although the total volume of water in the global hydrologic

cycle remains essentially constant, the distribution of this continually changing

on continents, in regions, and within local drainage basins.

Under certain well-defined conditions, the response of a watershed to rainfall,

infiltration and evaporation can be estimated if simple assumptions are made.

A watershed is defined as an area of land that drains to a single outlet and is

separated from other watershed by a watershed divide. A water budget

equation connects the elements of the hydrological cycle. For example, for a

given watershed a water budget equation for time step of t is given by

Pt - SRt - Gt- Et - Tt = St (1.1)

Where Pt = rainfall (mm)

SRt = Surface runoff (mm)

Gt = groundwater flow (mm)

Page 16: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

INTRODUCTION 7 ___________________________________________________________________________ Et = Evaporation (mm)

Tt = Transpiration (mm)

St = Change in storage (mm)

Note that if t is a year, it may be assumed for preliminary analysis that what is

infiltrated will be shown up in the groundwater flow, and thus the infiltration

term may not be considered in Eq. (1.1) and the change in storage term may be

zero.

Example 1.1 In a given year, a watershed with a drainage area of 215 km2 received

900 mm of rainfall. The average flow rate measured at the outlet of the watershed was

3.1 m3/s. Estimate the amount of water lost due to the combined effects of

evaporation and transpiration. Assume the annual change in storage is zero.

Solution:

The equivalent runoff depth in mm over the watershed is calculated by dividing the

annual volume of runoff by the watershed area.

Runoff depth = (3.1 * 86400 s/day * 365 d/year * 1000mm/m ) / (215 km2 * 106 m2/km2 )

Then using Eq.(1.1): Pt - (Rt + Gt) - Et - Tt = St, we estimate (Et + Tt )

900 mm - (3.1 * 86400 s/day * 365 d/year * 1000mm/m ) / (215 km2 * 10

6

m

2/km

2 ) - (Et + Tt ) = 0.

(Et + Tt ) = 900 - 454.7 = 445.3 mm

445.3 mm of rainfall is consumed annually by evaporation and transpiration over the

whole watershed.

Page 17: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

INTRODUCTION 8 ___________________________________________________________________________

1.4 Practice problems

1.1. The following yearly data were collected from a 2000 km2 catchment. Total

precipitation is 620 mm, total combined loss due to evaporation and

evapotranspiration is 350 mm, estimated groundwater outflow is 100 mm,

and mean surface runoff is 150 mm. What is the change in volume of water

(m3) remaining in storage in the catchment at the end of the elapsed year.

1.2. The average annual discharge of the Nile river having basin area of 2.96x106

km2 is 100 x10

9 m

3. Calculate the discharge per unit area in m

3/s/100-km

2.

1.3. A watershed with a drainage area of 450 km2 received 700 mm of

rainfall in a given rainy three months. The average flow rate measured at the

outlet of the watershed over these three months was 15 m3/s. Estimate the

amount of water lost due to the combined effects of evaporation and

transpiration, and groundwater storage.

1.4. What is a hydrological cycle? How does it keep a balance between the water

of the earth and the moisture in the atmosphere?

1.5. List the major water resources projects in your area. What specific

hydrological problems did each project involve?

Page 18: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 9

____________________________________________________________

2 RAINFALL

It is common observation that in rainy months dark clouds of large extent often yield

rains of various magnitude and duration. Questions such as sources of rain bearing

clouds, transportation mechanism of these clouds to Ethiopia need to be answered.

In this chapter attempt is made to explain the above questions by describing first the

general global circulation of the atmosphere, followed by the atmospheric circulation

in Africa, and finally, we discuss the physical rainfall producing mechanisms over

Ethiopia.

Note that in this teaching material rainfall has the meaning as precipitation,

although strictly defined rainfall is the liquid form of rainfall excluding hail

and snow. In tropical areas snow-falls has not been observed.

2.1. Causes of rainfall over Ethiopia

To explain causes of rainfall over Ethiopia, first the general circulation at global scale

is described, then African scale atmospheric circulation will be treated. Finally the

circulation that affect the Ethiopian climate under the general setting will be

discussed.

2.1.1. General circulation of the global atmosphere

The weather features we consider here range from local breezes and shower

clouds to the great wave patterns that circle the globe. Formally weather is

defined as the day-to-day state of the atmosphere, consists of short-term

variations of energy and mass exchanges within the atmosphere and between

the earth and the atmosphere. It results from processes that attempt to equalise

differences in the distribution of the net radiant energy from the sun. Acting

over an extended period of time, these exchange of processes accumulate to

become climate. All of these systems are part of the process of the atmosphere

transport of energy. At the largest scale this is a reflection of the fact that the

solar energy absorbed in equatorial region is greater than the outgoing infrared

radiation, whereas in polar regions the reverse applies (Figure 2.1). So, to

achieve a global energy balance the atmosphere and the oceans must transport

energy from the equator to the poles. This is the engine that drives the

principal components of the global weather machine.

Page 19: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 10

____________________________________________________________

If the Earth's surface were smooth and of uniform composition, the long-term

mean patterns of wind, temperature, and rainfall will show nothing but zonal

bands but with no longitudinal variation. Moreover, if the Earth did not rotate

energy transport would involve a simple meridional circulation with air rising

at the equator and flowing to the poles, descending, and returning at low level

to the equator. With a rotating Earth the motion involves horizontal vortices

and waves. The distribution of the oceans and continents across the globe

make these motions still more complex, but the broad features retain many of

the features of the simple zonal models (Burroughs, 1991).

Figure 2-1. In general, the amount of solar energy absorbed by the Earth at each

latitude differs from the amount of terrestrial radiation emitted at the same latitude

and so energy has to be transferred from equatorial to polar region (after Burroughs, 1991).

A schematic representation of the zonal wind systems near the Earth's surface

consists of easterly trade winds in the tropics, calm subtropical high pressure

zones, mid-latitude westerlies, and stormy low and high pressure zones close

to the poles. In cross-section these zones can be represented as three

Page 20: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 11

____________________________________________________________

circulation systems covering the tropics, the mid-latitudes, and the polar

regions.

The weather in tropical regions is dominated by vertical circulation. Known as

the Hadley cell, after George Hadley, the general motion consists of air rising

near the equator to the heights of up to 20 km and then spreading out 20 -

30N and 20 - 30S latitudes before descending and flowing back toward the

equator. Schematic diagram of the Hadley circulation is shown in Figure 2.2.

Figure 2-2. Hadley circulation: a vigorous upward branch in the tropics, fed by low-

level convergence of moist air flowing over the warm sea and driven by the latent heat released from the "hot towers" of cumulo-nimbus clouds. The flow from these

cumulus towers can extend to the lower stratosphere, whence there is upper level

divergence as the air streams towards the sub-tropics. Under the action of radiative

cooling to space, this air sinks in the region of the sub-tropical high pressure systems, thus completing the overall circulation (after Bonnel et al., 1993).

Page 21: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 12

____________________________________________________________

Figure 2-3. The position of the ITCZ ( Inter tropical front in some zones) in February and August (after Barry and Chorley, 1982).

The rising air at the equator is humid, and cools as it rises. This leads to the

formation of touring shower clouds which girdle the Earth and produce heavy

rainfall to the equatorial regions. The precise position of this band of

convective activity, known as the Intertropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ),

varies with the movement of the noon-day Sun throughout the year. It tends to

follow the Sun and the distribution of the oceans and continents in the

equatorial regions.

Figure 2.3 shows the position of the ITCZ in February and August (from Barry

and Chorley, 1982). Note that in view of the discontinuity of convergence in

time and space, the term Inter-tropical Confluence (ITC) is now preferred. In

the following section we discuss in details the characteristics of the ITCZ.

Page 22: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 13

____________________________________________________________

2.1.2 Formation of the Intertropical Convergence Zone

The convection generated by frictional induced convergence in the Trade

Wind boundary layer produces individual cumulus clouds 1 to 10 km in

diameter, which group into meso-scale convective units of some 100 km

across, and that these, in turn, form cloud clusters

Figure 0-4. The meso-scale and synoptic structure of the Intertropical Convergence

Zone (ITCZ), showing a model of the spatial distribution (above) and of the vertical structure (below) of the convective elements which form the cloud clusters (from

Mason, 1970)

Page 23: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 14

____________________________________________________________

100 to 1000 km in diameter (see Fig. 2.4) either along the ITCZ or in the

troughs of lower tropospheric wave disturbances which have wavelengths of

2000 to 3000 km.

Seasonal shifts of the wind field convergence are partly a response to

alternating activity in the subtropical high-pressure cells of the two

hemispheres but, on a shorter time scale, the synoptic activity along the ITC

obscures any simple relationships.

2.1.3 The African sector of ITCZ and the associated rainfall

Most of the rainfall in sub-Saharan Africa is associated with the African sector

of the ITCZ. This ITCZ is associated with the convergence of air streams from

the subtropical highs. Where these flows meet, strong upward motion occurs

which, provided the air contains sufficient moisture, will cause rainfall. The

lifting of the moist air is further enhanced by mountains that are inducing

orograhic rainfall.

Figure 2.5b shows the average convergence of the near surface winds into the

ITCZ in July near and over Africa (Folland et al., 1991). Moist lower and

mid-tropospheric monsoon winds that originate from the tropical Atlantic

enter the region from desert. In the eastern third of the Sahel, the south to

south-west winds may sometimes originate from central Africa or the Indian

Ocean. The ITCZ moves northward in the summer into the southern Sahara

desert in response to increased solar heating and reaches its most northern

position in August (Figure 2.5a).

The position of the ITCZ shown in Figure 2.5b is that at the Earth's surface; a

few kilometres up in the atmosphere the ITCZ is several degrees of latitude

further south. Most of the rainfall associated with the ITCZ generally falls

over a wide band starting several degrees to the south of its surface position,

since here the moist south-west monsoon airflow is sufficiently deep for

rainfall to occur .

Page 24: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 15

____________________________________________________________

Figure 0-5. map of mean annual African rainfall (mm) for approximately 1920 -73

showing the position of the Intertropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ) in July and January; (b) map of the long-term average winds near the surface in July over and

near Africa (after Folland et al., 1991).

Page 25: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 16

____________________________________________________________

Figure 0-6. Schematic diagram of the structure of air masses over western Africa and the

rainfall process in the Sahel region (after Beran and Rodier, 1985).

2.1.4 Ethiopian rainfall climate

Ethiopia is a mountainous country with about 1.1 million km2 area, and with large

part of the country lying between 1800 and 2400 m above mean sea level. The

highest mountain rises over 4600 m. There are lowland regions (-200 to 500 m) in

the extreme boundaries of the country.

Most of Ethiopia has tropical climate moderated by altitude with a marked wet

season. The eastern lowlands are much dries with a hot semi arid to desert

climate. In the highlands of Ethiopia, temperatures are reasonably warm around

the year but rarely hot.

In Ethiopia in general there are three seasons: the first is the dry season (locally

known as Bega) which prevails from October to January, the second is the small

rainy season (Belg) that runs from February to May and the third is the main rainy

season (Keremt) which prevails from June to September. Rainfall is above 1000

mm a year almost everywhere in the highlands and it rises to as much as 2000 -

3000 mm in the wetter southwestern parts. Annual rainfall decreases when one

Page 26: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 17

____________________________________________________________

moves to the east and north of the country. Night time temperature fall to nearly

or below freezing in mountainous area (> 2500 m). In the northern lowlands,

Danakil depression, the southern lowlands, and Ogaden rainfall is low (< 300

mm/year) and temperatures are high (> 30 C) around the year.

Since Ethiopia is situated in the northeast of Africa it is influenced by the

northeast, to the Southeast and Southwest (west African) monsoons bringing

moisture from the Indian and Atlantic Oceans. In the boreal summer the moisture

gradually penetrates into the countries as the African sector of the Intertropical

Convergence Zone progresses northward. In general, annual rainfall amounts

decreases from the south to the north but the topography as well strongly

influences the rainfall. Ethiopia has one of the largest highland areas in the

tropics; it represents 50% of the land above 2000 m in Africa. The main synoptic

features that affects the Ethiopian rainfall are given Table 2.1.

Table 0-1: Main synoptic features affecting Ethiopian rainfall (summarized from Babu,

2002).

Major synoptic features affecting rainfall over Ethiopia

Season ITCZ (south

Atlantic ocean

effect / El Nino,

SOI )

North Indian

Ocean effect

Low level Jet

and Tropical

easterly Jet

Remarks

June – Sept

(main rainy

season)

ITCZ moves

northwards to Red

Sea. Most of Ethiopia receives

rains

SST condition

influence the

main rains

Active and

moves

northwards

South and

southeastern parts of

Ethiopia do not receive rains.

Feb – May

(small rainy

season)

ITCZ is in south

Ethiopia bringing rains to south and

southwestern

Ethiopia.

Moisture

source for eastern,

southeastern,

and some central

highlands part

of Ethiopia

receives useful rains.

Moves

northwards

As important as the

main rain season for eastern and

northeastern Ethiopia

Oct – Jan

(“dry

season”)

ITCZ is located

further south and brings rain for

extreme south and

southeastern

Ethiopia.

Occasionally

causes some untimely

rainfall in

most part of

Ethiopia

Weak and

migrate southwards

Crop harvesting time

in most of Ethiopia

Page 27: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 18

____________________________________________________________

Page 28: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 19

____________________________________________________________

Figure 0-7. Mean annual isohyetal map of Ethiopia (mm)

Page 29: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 20

____________________________________________________________

2.2 The physics of rainfall formation

The formation of rainfall requires the lifting of an air mass in the atmosphere so

that it cools and some of its moisture condenses. The three mechanisms of air

mass lifting are frontal lifting, where warm air is lifted over cooler air by frontal

passage; orographic lifting, in which an air mass rises to pass over a mountain

range; and convective lifting, where air is drawn upwards by convective action,

such as in the center of a thunderstorm cell.

Figure 0-8. Water droplets in clouds are formed by nucleation of vapor on

aerosols, then go through many condensation-evaporation cycle as they circulate

in the cloud, until they aggregate into large enough drops to fall through the cloud

base (Chow, 1988).

Droplets become

heavy, enough to fall

(0.1 mm)

Droplets

increase in size

by condensation

Many droplets

decrease in size

by evaporation

Some droplets

increase in size by

impact and

aggregation

Droplets form by

nucleation – condensing of

vapor on tiny solid particles

called aerosols (0.001 – 10

m)

Large drops break

up ( 3 – 5 mm)

Rain drops (0.1 – 3 mm)

Page 30: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 21

____________________________________________________________

Formation of rainfall in clouds is illustrated in Fig. 2.8. As air rises and cools,

water condenses from the vapor to the liquid state. If the temperature is below the

freezing point, then ice crystals are formed instead. Condensation requires a seed

called a condensation nucleus around which the water molecules attach or

nucleate themselves. Particles of dust floating in because the ions electrostatically

attract the polar-bonded water molecules. Ions in the atmosphere include particles

of salt derived from evaporated sea spray, and sulfur and nitrogen compounds

resulting from combustion. The tiny droplets grow by condensation and impact

with their neighbors as they are carried by turbulent air motion, until they become

large enough so that the force of gravity overcomes that of friction and they begin

to fall, further increasing in size as they hit other droplets in the fall path.

However, as the drops falls, water evaporates from its surface and the drop size

diminishes, so the drop may be reduced to the size of an aerosol again and be

carried upwards in the cloud through turbulent action.

2.3 Estimation of Precipitable Water

Precipitable water is the total amount of water vapor in column of air expresses as

the depth of liquid water in mm over the base area of the column. The precipitable

water (w) gives an estimate of maximum possible rainfall under the unreal

assumption of total condensation. It is given by:

(2.1)

Where p is in mb, qv in g/kg and g=9.81 m/s2.

In practice we use the following discrete form of the above equation:

Example 2.1: From a radiosonde (balloon) ascent, the pairs of measurements of pressure

and specific humidity shown in Table below were obtained. The precipitable water in a

column of air up to the 250 mb level is calculated.

p q g

0.1 = (mm) W v

p

p

2

1

(2.2)

dp q g

0.1 = (mm) W v

p

p

2

1

Page 31: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 22

____________________________________________________________

Pressure (mb) 1005 850 750 700 620 600 500 400 250

Specific

humidity qv

(g/kg)

14.2 12.4 9.5 7.0 6.3 5.6 3.8 1.7 0.2

p 155 100 50 80 20 100 100 150

Mean qv 13.3 10.9 8.2 6.6 5.9 4.7 2.7 0.9

Meanqv . p 2061 1095 4125 532 119 470 275 142

The sum of the qv p = 5107.5, the precipitable water up to the 250 mb level is given by

0.1 /g*5107.5= 52.1 mm.

2.4 Measurement of rainfall and optimum number of rain

guages

The basic instrument for rainfall measurement is rain gauge, which samples the

incidence of rainfall at a specific point, through an orifice of known area. Figure

2.9 shows commonly used non-recording and recording instruments. A recording

rain gage records the time it takes for rainfall depth accumulation. Therefore, it

provides not only a measure of rainfall depth but also of rainfall intensity. The

slope of the curve showing accumulated rainfall depth versus time is a measure of

the instantaneous rainfall intensity.

A rainfall gauge site should have some level ground and has ideal shelter. A rain

gauge should be placed from a tree or a building at more than two times of the

height of the tree or the building. It is to be noted that inconsistencies in rainfall

record are often caused by change in the rain gauge site location and

surroundings.

Optimum number of rain gauges. Statistics has been used in determining the

optimum number of rain gauges required to be installed in a given catchment. The

basis behind such statistical calculations is that a certain number of rain gauge

stations are necessary to give average rainfall with a certain percentage of error. If

the allowable error is more, lesser number of gauges would be required. The

optimum number of rain gauges (N) can be obtained using:

Page 32: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 23

____________________________________________________________

Where: Cv = Coefficient of variation of rainfall based on the existing rain gauge

stations;

E = Allowable percentage error in the estimate of basic mean rainfall

Example: There are four rain gauge stations existing in the catchment of a river. The

average annual rainfall values at these stations are 800, 620, 400 and 540 mm

respectively. (a) Determine the optimum number of rain gauges in the catchment, if it is

desired to limit error in the mean value of rainfall in the catchment to 10%. (b) How

many more gauges will then be required to be installed?

Solution. The mean rainfall is (800 + 620 + 400 + 540) / 4 = 590 mm; the standard

deviation of station annual rainfall is 166.93 mm. The coefficient of variation = mean /

standard deviation = 166.93 / 590 = 28.29

The optimum number of rain gauges is then

Additional number of stations required is 8 - 4 = 4.

WMO recommends a guideline for checking the adequacy of a meteorological

network. Table 2 shows this guideline. It is important to note that to assess the

adequacy of the network of a basin, the number of stations and their spatial

distribution play an important role.

It is important to carefully plan the location of rain gauges in relation to the

location of stream flow gauging stations, in order to perform extension of stream

flow records, flood forecasting, or hydrological analysis. As guideline, rainfall

gauging should be located so that watershed rainfall can be estimated for each

stream gauging station. It is also suggested that gauges are located in the upper,

middle and lower part of a watershed giving good spatial coverage.

2

E

C = N v (2.3)

2

E

C = N v = 004.8

10

29.282

= N

Page 33: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 24

____________________________________________________________

Table 0-2. Recommended minimum densities of meteorological network as

applied for the different physiographic unit of a river basin (WMO, 1994).

Region Minimum density (km2/ station)

Non-recording Recording

Mountainous region 250 2 500

Interior plains / Flat regions

under difficult conditions

575 5 750

Hilly / undulating 575 5 750

Arid zones* 10 000 100 000

* Arid zone herein is defined as annual rainfall < 450 mm, temperature greater than 27 0C, potential evaporation is 20 times greater than annual rainfall

2.5 Estimating missing rainfall data

Due to the absence of observer or instrumental failure rainfall data record

occasionally are incomplete. In such a case one can estimate the missing data by

using the nearest station rainfall data. If for example rainfall data at day 1 is

missed from station X having mean annual rainfall of Nx and there are three

surrounding stations with mean annual rainfall of N1, N2, and N3 then the missing

data Px can be estimated

Px = (P1 +P2 +P3)/3

(2.3a)

provided N1, N2, and N3 differ within 10% of Nx).

or

provided N1, N2, or N3 differ by more than 10% of Nx . Equation 2.3b is the

method of normal ration.

The second method is a reciprocal weighting factor which takes into account the

distance between the missing data gauge and the other gauges surrounding the

missed gauge. These methods are illustrated in Example 2.2 and 2.3.

Example 2.2 Rainfall station X was inoperative for part of a month during which a

storm occurred. The respective storm totals at three surrounding stations A, B, and C

)N

NP +

N

NP +

N

NP(

3

1 = P

3

x3

2

x2

1

x1x (2.3b)

Page 34: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 25

____________________________________________________________

were 107, 89, and 122 mm. The normal annual rainfall amounts of station X, A, B, and C

are 978, 1120, 935, and 1200 mm respectively. Estimate the storm rainfall for station X

for its missing month.

Solution Nx = 978 mm, 10% of Nx = 97.8 mm. Thus the maximum permissible

annual rainfall At either of the three stations for taking ordinary mean 978+97.8 = 1075.8

mm. But stations A and C normal annual rainfall are > than 1075.8 so use the normal

ratio method, with that Px is estimated to be 95.3 mm.

Example 2.3.

Page 35: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 26

____________________________________________________________

Page 36: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 27

____________________________________________________________

Page 37: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 28

____________________________________________________________

Figure 0-9. This diagram illustrates two commonly used non-recording instruments, the standard

BritishMeteorological Office gauge (A) and the U.S. Weather Bureau standard gauge (B); a

Nipher type gauge shield and a wire gauge cylinder which can be used to assess horizontal

interception (D). The construction and principle of operation of three recording instruments is

also shown along with an example of the chart produced by a tilting-siphon-recording gauge.

Page 38: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 29

____________________________________________________________

2.6 Point rainfall analysis and classification of storms

2.6.1 Point rainfall analysis

A typical recording rain gage chart is given in Figure 2.10. The line on the chart is

a cumulative rainfall curve, the slope of the line being proportional to the intensity

of the rainfall. The peak is the point of reversal of the recording gage. An example

of rain gage chart analysis is given in Table 2.3.

Figure 0-10. Rain gage chart from a rain gage of the reversible, recording type.

Page 39: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 30

____________________________________________________________

Table 0-3: Rain gage chart analysis

Time

(a.m.)

Time

Interval

(min)

Cumulative

time

(min)

Rainfall

during

interval

(mm)

Cumulative

Rainfall

(mm)

Rainfall

Intensity

for Interval

(mm/h)

6:50

7:00 0 10 1 1 6

7:10 10 20 10 11 60

7:15 5 25 11 22 132

7:35 20 45 46 68 138

7:45 10 55 19 87 114

8:25 40 95 31 118 47

9:10 45 40 6 124 8

10:50 100 240 6 130 4

2.6.2 Storm temporal pattern classification

Since no two rainstorms have the same time-intensity relationship, it is often

convenient to group storms with regard to their characteristics as described by

rainfall intensity histogram. Commonly found rainfall intensity patterns such as

uniform intensity, advanced pattern, intermediate pattern, delayed pattern are

shown in Figure 2.11.

Figure 0-11: Typical rainfall intensity pattern

Uniform

Delayed

Advanced

Intermediate

Time

Intensity

Page 40: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 31

____________________________________________________________

In general, the cold front produces a storm of an advanced type, and the warm

front a uniform or intermediate pattern.

2.7 Estimation of average depth of rainfall over a catchment

Several methods are commonly used for estimating average rainfall over a

watershed. Choice of method requires judgment in consideration of quality and

nature of the data, and the importance, use, and required precision of the result.

Here in three methods of estimating areal average depth of rainfall are discussed.

The first is the arithmetic mean method, the second is the Thiessen polygon

method, and the third is the isohyetal method. Before we discuss these methods,

first we will elaborate techniques for changing point rainfall to area rainfall in

case of only one rain gauge is available in and around the watershed.

2.7.1 Changing point rainfall to area rainfall

When the area of a basin exceeds about 25 km2, rainfall observations at a single

station, even if it is at the center of the catchment, will usually be inadequate for

the design of drainage works. Rainfall records within the catchment and its

immediate surroundings thus must be analyzed to take proper account of the

spatial and temporal variation of rainfall over the basin.

For areas large enough for the average rainfall depth to depart appreciably from

that at a point, one should apply area-reduction factor. Fig. (2.12) provides curves

for calculating areal depths as a percentage of point rainfall values.

Page 41: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 32

____________________________________________________________

Figure 0-12. Depth-area, or area-reduction, curves.

2.7.2 The arithmetic mean method

The central assumption in the arithmetic mean method is that each rainguage has

equal weight and thus the mean depth over a watershed is estimated by:

where: Pj = the station j,

N = the total number of rainguages in and around the watershed.

It is a simple method, and well applicable if the gages are uniformly distributed

over the watershed and individual gage measurements do not vary greatly about

their mean.

N

P = P

jN

j=1

(2.4)

Page 42: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 33

____________________________________________________________

2.7.3 The Thiessen polygon method

The Thiessen polygon method involves assigning relative weights to the gages in

computing the areal average. The assumption in the method is that at any point in

the watershed, the rainfall is the same as that at the nearest gage so the depth

recorded at a given gage is applied out to a distance halfway to the next station in

any direction.

The relative weights of each gage are determined from the corresponding areas of

application in a Thiessen polygon network, the boundaries of the polygons being

formed by the perpendicular bisectors of the lines joining adjacent gages.

(2.5)

Where: Aj = the area of polygon j in the watershed (km2)

Pj = rainfall amount in polygon j (mm)

P = average rainfall (mm)

The disadvantages of the Thiessen method are its inflexibility that is addition of

new station implies construction of new polygon, and it does not directly account

for orographic influences of rainfall.

2.7.4 The isohyetal method

The isohyets are drawn between the gauges over a contour base map taking into

account exposure and orientation of both gauges and the catchment surface. The

rainfall calculation is based on finding the average rainfallPi between each pair

of isohyets, and the area between them in the watershed Aj. Equation (2.5) then

used to estimate the average rainfall over the catchment.

The method is good where there is a dense network of raingages. It is also flexible

and considers orographic effect.

Example 2.4 Rainfall averaging methods: Three raingauges (p1, p2, p3) are installed in a

catchment having an area of 250 km2. Determine the average rainfall using the arithmetic

A = A ,PA A

1 = P J

J

1=j

jj

J

1=j

Page 43: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 34

____________________________________________________________

mean, Thiessen polygon, and isohyetal methods if a daily rainfall amounts of p1 = 45

mm, p2 = 48 and p3 = 52 mm were recorded in July 15, 1998..

Solution:

(a) Arithmetic mean method: P = (45 +48 + 52 ) / 3 = 48.3 mm.

(b) The Thiessen polygon method: The area created by the dotted lines and the boundary

of the watershed surrounding each rainfall station is measured. Accordingly for

(c) The isohyetal method:

51 mm

48 mm

45 mm

42 mm

39 mm

36 mm

54 mm

p1 p3

p2

p1 p3

p2

A1 = 94 km2, A2 = 92 km2 and A3 = 64 km2.

Using equation 2.5 we get

P = 1/250 (45*94 + 48*92 + 52*64) = 47.8 mm

p1 =45 p3 = 52

p2 = 48

Areas in between contours beginning from

36 mm line in km2 are:

A1 = 8, A2 =17, A3= 32, A4 =40, A5= 70, A6

= 83. P = 1/250 ((36+39)*0.5* 8+

(39+42)*0.5*17+(42+45)*0.5*32+(45+48)*0.

5*40+(48+51)*0.5*70+(51+54)*0.5*83) =

48.2 mm

Page 44: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 35

____________________________________________________________

2.9 Intensity-duration-frequency curves

Intensity-duration-frequency (IDF) curves (equations) summarize conditional

probability (frequency)of rainfall depths or average intensities. Specifically, IDF

curves are graphical representations of the probability that a certain average

rainfall intensity will occur, given a duration.

IDF curves are used in many hydrological design projects involving urban

drainage, bridge sizing, spillway sizing, etc where there is a need to determine

design storm magnitude (or intensity of rainfall for specified duration) for

required return period.

In establishing IDF curves it is important to know commonly used design

frequencies (return period) for a specific water control structures. Table 2.4 gives

generalized design criteria - return period- for water-control structures.

Table 0-4. Generalized design criteria - return period- for water-control structures

Type of structures Return period (years)

Highway culverts

Low traffic

Intermediate traffic

High traffic

5 -10

10 - 25

50 - 100

Highway bridges

Secondary system

Primary system

10 -50

50 -100

Farm drainage

Culverts

Ditches

5 -50

5 -50

Urban drainage

Storm sewer in small cities

Storm sewer in large cities

2 - 25

25 -50

Airfield

Low traffic

Intermediate traffic

High traffic

5 -10

10 -25

50 -100

Levees

On farms

Around cities

2 -50

50 -200

Dams (small -large) ( 50 - 1000+)

Page 45: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 36

____________________________________________________________

IDF curves can be described mathematically to facilitate calculations. For

example, one can use

(2.6)

Where:

i = the design rainfall intensity (mm/hr)

t = the duration (hr)

c = a coefficient which depends on the exceedence probability

e & f = coefficients which vary with locations

For a given return period, the three constants can be estimated to reproduce i for

three different t's spanning a range of interest. An example of IDF curve for Addis

Ababa is shown in Figure 2.15 .

Figure 2.15: Intensity-duration-frequency curves of Addis Ababa for different return periods

used in the design of the Addis Ababa Ring Road Project.

ft

ci

e

IDF curves of Addis Ababa

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Time (hr)

Rain

fall

(m

m /

hr)

T = 1000

T = 100

T = 50

T = 25

Page 46: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 37

____________________________________________________________

2.10 Double mass analysis

Double mass curve technique is often used to test the consistency of rainfall

record. The procedure is that accumulated rainfall at the gauge station whose

record is in doubt is plotted as ordinate versus the average concurrent

accumulated average rainfall of nearby stations whose rainfall data are reliable.

The procedure is illustrated in Figure 2.16.

Figure 2.16. Double mass analysis technique

Where there is a break point in the graph is noted, the doubt station data may be

adjusted to the previous slope value if the reason for doing so is convincing.

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

0 100 200 300 400 500

Cum

ula

tive a

nnual

valu

es o

f sta

tion z

(m

m)

Cumulative annual value of reference station (mm)

Double-mass anlaysis

Breakpoint

Page 47: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 38

____________________________________________________________

Example 2.5.

Page 48: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 39

____________________________________________________________

Page 49: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 40

____________________________________________________________

Page 50: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 41

____________________________________________________________

2.11 Rainfall regime in Ethiopia.

ERA (2002) drainage manual provides six rainfall regime areas (Figure 2.17)

established based on rainfall stations shown in Table 2.4. Also using the statistical

analyses, rainfall intensity-duration curves have been developed for commonly

used design frequencies see “Figures 5-5 through 5-12” of ERA 2002 Manual.

These basic information will be used in estimating peak flood for small and large

watersheds.

Table 2.4 Meteorology Stations with relatively long record period

Meteorological

Region

Station Years of

Record

Meteorological

Region Station Years

of

Record

A1 Axum 18 B Bedele 19

Mekele 35 Gore 45

Maychew 24 Nekempte 27

A2 Gondar 40 Jima 45

Debre Tabor 22 Arba Minch 11

Bahir Dar 35 Sodo 28

Debre Markos 44 Awasa 26

Fitche 25 C Kombolcha 46

Addis Ababa 33 Woldiya 23

A3 Nazareth 40 Sirinka 17

Kulumsa 31 D1 Gode 29*

Robe/Bale 19 Kebri Dihar 38

A4 Metehara 28 D2 Kibre Mengist 24

Dire Dawa 46 Negele 45

Mieso 35 Moyale 18

* max 24 hour rainfall not given Yabelo 34

Years of record through 1997

Page 51: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 42

____________________________________________________________

Figure 2-17 Rainfall Regions (ERA, 2002)

Note: Rainfall data used in the preparation of this figure have been collected from many Ministry

of Water Resources meteorology stations (see Table 2-4). In the course of the preparation of this manual, they have been subjected to statistical techniques. The results indicate that the country

can be divided into the above hydrological regions displaying similar rainfall patterns. The

information is subject to review, and future data may indicate the need for a further refinement in both values and regional boundaries.

Page 52: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 43

____________________________________________________________

Intensity-Duration-Frequency

Regions A1 & A4

Figure 5-9

0,0

50,0

100,0

150,0

200,0

250,0

300,0

350,0

400,0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Duration, min.

Inte

nsit

y, m

m/h

r 2 Year

5 Year

10 Year

25 year

50 Year

100 Year

Page 53: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 44

____________________________________________________________

Intensity-Duration-Frequency

Regions A2 & A3

Figure 5-10

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Duration, min.

Inte

ns

ity,

mm

/hr 2 Year

5 Year

10 Year

25 year

50 Year

100 Year

Page 54: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 45

____________________________________________________________

Intensity-Duration-Frequency

Bahir Dar & Lake Tana

Figure 5-12

0,0

50,0

100,0

150,0

200,0

250,0

300,0

350,0

400,0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Duration, min.

Inte

ns

ity,

mm

/hr

2 Year

5 Year

10 Year

25 year

50 Year

100 Year

0.0

50.0

100.0

150.0

200.0

250.0

300.0

350.0

400.0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Inte

ns

ity, m

m/h

r

Duration, min.

Intensity-Duration-FrequencyRegions B, C & D

Figure 5-11

2 Year

5 Year

10 Year

25 year

50 Year

100 Year

Page 55: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 46

____________________________________________________________

2.12 Practice Problems

1.1 The following rainfall data were recorded at a station for storm of August

24-25, 1981.

1.2 Plot the rainfall hyetograph, compute & plot the cumulative rainfall

hyetograph. Calculate the maximum depth and intensity recorded in 10, 20, and 30

minutes for this storm.

Time (min) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

Rainfall (mm) - 2.0 5.0 6.2 5.3 5.2 4.0 3.0 1.0

2.2 The mean and standard deviation of the annual maximum rainfall depths for various

duration recorded at a town are shown below. Determine for each duration, the design

rainfall intensity for return periods of 2, 5, 10, 25, 50, and 100 years. Use the Extreme

Value Type I (Gumbel) distribution. Plot the results as a set of intensity-duration-

frequency curves.

Duration Mean depth (mm) Standard deviation

(mm)

5 min 13 3

10 min 20 6

15 min 26 8

30 min 38 13

1 hr 49 17

2 hr 56 21

3 hr 63 20

1 day 105 63

2.3 The annual precipitation at station X and the average annual rainfall at 8

neighboring stations whose data are reliable are given below. Check the consistency of

the annual rainfall data at station X.

Year

8-stations annual

average rainfall (mm)

Annual rainfall at

station X (mm)

1972 28 35

1973 29 37

1974 31 39 1975 27 35

Page 56: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 47

____________________________________________________________

1976 25 30

1977 21 25

1978 17 20

1979 21 24 1980 26 30

1981 31 31

1982 36 35 1983 39 38

1984 44 40

1985 32 28

1986 30 25 1987 23 21

2.4 The watershed divide line for a given watershed can be approximated by a polygon

whose vertices are located at the following coordinates in km: (5, 5), (-5, 5), (-5, -5), (0, -

10), and (5, -5). The rainfall amounts of a storm were recorded by a number of rain

gauges situated within and nearby the watershed as follows:

Gage number Coordinates (km) Recorded rainfall

(mm)

1 (7, 4) 62

2 (3, 4) 59

3 (-2, 5) 41

4 (-10, 1) 39

5 (-3, -3) 105

6 (-7, -7) 98

7 (2, -3) 60

8 (2, -10) 41

9 (0, 0) 81

Determine the average rainfall on the basin by (a) the arithmetic mean method, (b) the

Thiessen method, and (c) the isohyetal method if the maximum rainfall line is on the

ridge running southwest to northeast through (-3, -3).

Page 57: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Rainfall 48

____________________________________________________________

2.5 The table below gives the annual rainfall amounts of 6 rain gauges installed in a

catchment of 100 km2 . Thiessen polygon area associated for each rain gauge is also

given in km2. It is planned to build a dam at the outlet of the catchment.

Consider the following conditions:

(I) a minimum discharge of 200 l/s should be released from this proposed dam to downstream users throughout the year,

(II) 35 % of the annual rainfall is lost from the catchment through infiltration

and evapotranspiration, and (III) the annual net evaporation loss from 15

km2 surface area of the reservoir is 400mm.

Calculate the annual areal rainfall in the catchment

(b) The annual average net volume of water

Annual rainfall data (mm) and Thiessen polygon area in (km2)

Rain gauge

1

2

3

4

5

6 1999 rainfall (mm)

2052

1915

1868

1723

1640

1510

Thiessen polygon area (km

2)

12

14

25

21

15

13

Page 58: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 49

__________________________________________________________________

.

3. EVAPORATION

Evaporation occurs when water is converted into water vapor at the evaporating

surface, the contact between water body and overlapping air. At the evaporative

surface, there is a continuous exchange of liquid water molecule into water vapor

& vice versa.

The two main factors influencing evaporation from an open water surface are the

supply of energy to provide the latent heat of vaporization, and the ability to

transport the vapor away from the evaporative surface. The latent heat of

vaporization lv is the amount of heat absorbed by a unit mass of a substance. Solar

radiation is the main source of heat energy.

The magnitude of annual evaporation is highly dependent on the prevailing

climate in and around the water body. Evaporation has significant impact on

water resources development especially in arid and semi-arid regions.

Evaporation from Lake Nasser in Egypt (arid region) is about 3000 mm/year,

where as evaporation from Lake Koka is about 1500 mm/year, which is half of

that from Lake Nasser.

Evaporation rate is a function of several meteorological and environmental factors

such as net radiation, saturation vapor pressure, actual vapor pressure of air, air

and water surface temperature, wind velocity and atmospheric pressure. Section

3.1 discusses definition and measurements of these variables.

3.1 Definition of some meteorological variables

The atmosphere forms a distinctive, protective layer about 100 km thick around

the Earth. To the hydrologist, the troposphere (the first 11 km) is the most

important layer because it contains 75% of the weight of the atmosphere and

virtually all its moisture. On average, the temperature from ground level to the

tropopause falls steadily with increasing altitude at the rate of 6.5 oC /km. This is

known as the lapse rate.

Page 59: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 50

__________________________________________________________________

.

Evaporation at high altitudes is promoted due to low atmospheric pressure as

expressed in the psychrometric constant. The effect is, however, small and in the

calculation procedures, the average value for a location is sufficient. A

simplification of the ideal gas law, assuming 20°C for a standard atmosphere, can

be employed to calculate atmospheric pressure P:

(3.1)

where:

P atmospheric pressure [kPa],

z elevation above sea level [m],

The psychrometric constant, , is given by:

(3.2)

where

= Psychrometric constant [kPa °C-1

],

P = Atmospheric pressure [kPa],

= Latent heat of vaporization, 2.45 [MJ kg-1

],

cp = Specific heat at constant pressure, 1.013 10-3

[MJ kg-1

°C-1

], and

= ratio molecular weight of water vapour / dry air = 0.622.

The specific heat at constant pressure is the amount of energy required to increase

the temperature of a unit mass of air by one degree at constant pressure. Its value

depends on the composition of the air, i.e., on its humidity. For average

atmospheric conditions a value cp = 11.013 10-3

[MJ kg-1

°C-1

] can be used as an

average atmospheric pressure is used for each location.

Air density: air density of moist air (kg/m3)is estimated by a = 3.486 (p/(275 +

T)) where p is the atmospheric pressure in kPa and T is air temperature in degrees

Celsius.

Page 60: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 51

__________________________________________________________________

.

Water vapor: the amount of water vapor in the atmosphere is directly related to

the temperature. The water vapor content or humidity of air is usually measured

as a vapor pressure, and the units used is millibar (mb).

Specific humidity: The mass of water vapor per unit mass of moist air is called

specific humidity qv and equals the ratio of the densities of water vapor v and of

moist air a

Vapor pressure: Dalton's law of partial pressures states that the pressure exerted

by a gas (its vapor pressure) is independent of the pressure of other gases; the

vapor pressure e of the water vapor is given by the ideal gas law as

where T is the absolute temperature in K and Rv is the gas constant for water

vapor. If the total pressure exerted by the moist air is p, then p-e is the partial

pressure due to the dry air, and

The gas constant for water vapor is

a

v

v = q (3.3)

TR = e vv (3.4)

vda + = (3.6)

T R = e - p dd (3.5)

0.622

R = R

dv (3.7)

Page 61: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 52

__________________________________________________________________

.

where 0.622 is the ratio of the molecular weight of water vapor to the average

molecular weight of dry air.

Combining Eqs.(3.4), (3.5.) and (3.7) we get

The specific humidity qv is approximated by

where TR = p aa

The relationship between the gas constants for moist air and dry air is given by

Saturation vapor pressure es : For a given air temperature, there is a maximum

moisture content the air can hold and the corresponding vapor pressure is called

saturation vapor pressure es . At this vapor pressure, the rates of evaporation and

condensation are equal.

Over a water surface the saturation vapor pressure is related to the air temperature

with equation

Where es is in Pascal (Pa = N/m2) and T is air temperature in degree Celsius.

Due to the non-linearity of the above equation, the mean saturation vapour

pressure for a day, week, decade or month should be computed as the mean

TR )0.622

+ ( = p dv

d

(3.8)

p

e0.622 = q

v (3.9)

J/Kg.K 287 = R ),q0.608 + (1 R = R dvda (3.10)

T + 237.3

T17.27 611 = es exp (3.11)

Page 62: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 53

__________________________________________________________________

.

between the saturation vapour pressure at the mean daily maximum and minimum

air temperatures for that period. That is

(3.12)

Using mean air temperature instead of daily minimum and maximum

temperatures results in lower estimates for the mean saturation vapour pressure.

The corresponding vapour pressure deficit (a parameter expressing the

evaporating power of the atmosphere) will also be smaller and the result will be

some underestimation of the reference crop evapotranspiration. Therefore, the

mean saturation vapour pressure should be calculated as the mean between the

saturation vapour pressure at both the daily maximum and minimum air

temperature.

The relative humidity Rh: It is ratio of actual vapor pressure to its saturation

value at a given air temperature T and is given by

Dew-point temperature Td : The dew-point temperature Td is the temperature at

which space becomes saturated when air is cooled under constant pressure and

with constant water-vapor content. It is the temperature having a saturation vapor

pressure es equals to the existing vapor pressure e. Wet bulb thermometer

measures the dew point temperature.

Saturation deficit is the difference between the saturation vapor pressure at air

temperature es and the actual vapor pressure represented by the saturation vapor

pressure at Td which is the amount of water vapor in the air. The saturation deficit

(es - e) represents the further amount of water vapor that the air can hold at the

temperature Ta before becoming saturated.

e

e = R

s

h (3.13)

Page 63: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 54

__________________________________________________________________

.

Figure 3.1 Saturated vapor pressure as a function of temperature over water. Point C has

vapor pressure e and temperature T, for which the saturated vapor pressure es. The

temperature at which the air is saturated for vapor pressure e is the dew-point temperature

Td.

Figure 3.1 shows the saturation vapor pressure curve and the Td and T, es and e

relationship. If the barometric pressure is kept constant and the temperature is

reduced, i.e. if the air is cooled at constant barometric pressure, a stage will come

when the air will become saturated with the same amount of vapor.If the cooling

is continued, the vapor will get condensed on the contact surfaces. This

condensation will be in the form of dew if the dew point is > O 0C; and it will be

in the form of frost if the dew point is < 0 0C.

Example 3.1 At a climatic station, air pressure is measured as 100 kPa, air temperature

as 20 0C, and the wet-bulb, or dew-point, temperature as 16

0C. Calculate the

corresponding vapor pressure, relative humidity, specific humidity, and air density.

Solution: The saturated vapor pressure at T = 20 0C is given by

)T + 237.3

T(17.27 611 = es exp

Page 64: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 55

__________________________________________________________________

.

= 2339 Pa

and the actual vapor pressure e and the relative humidity are calculated using the dew-

point temperature Td=16 C

The relative humidity is = e/es

= 1819 /2339

= 0.78

= 78%

The air density is calculated from the ideal gas law

)20 + 237.3

20*17.27( 611 = es exp

1819Pa=

)16 + 237.3

16*17.27( 611 = e exp

p

e0.622 = qv

air moist kg

waterof kg0.01133 =

)100000

18190.622( = qv

)T(K)q0.608 + 287(1

p =

v

a

Page 65: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 56

__________________________________________________________________

.

= 1.18 kg/m3

Note that the actual vapor pressure can be determined from the difference

between the dry and wet bulb temperatures, the so-called wet bulb depression.

The relationship is expressed by the following equation:

ea = e° (Twet) - g psy (Tdry - Twet)

(3.14)

where

ea = Actual vapour pressure [kPa],

e°(Twet) = Saturation vapor pressure at wet bulb temperature [kPa],

= Psychrometric constant [kPa °C-1

],

Tdry-Twet = Wet bulb depression, with Tdry the dry bulb and Twet the wet bulb

temperature [°C].

The psychrometric constant of the instrument is given by:

gpsy = apsy P (3.15)

where apsy is a coefficient depending on the type of ventilation of the wet bulb

[°C-1

], and P is the atmospheric pressure [kPa]. The coefficient apsy depends

mainly on the design of the psychrometer and rate of ventilation around the wet

bulb. The following values are used:

apsy = 0.000662 for ventilated (Asmann type) psychrometers, with an air

movement of some 5 m/s,

0.000800 for natural ventilated psychrometers (about 1 m/s),

0.001200 for non-ventilated psychrometers installed indoors.

.01133)293*0.608 + 287(1

100000 =

a

Page 66: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 57

__________________________________________________________________

.

3.2 Measurements of some meteorological variables

A site for a meteorological station need to be level ground about 10 m by 7 m in

extent covered by short grass and enclosed by open fencing or railings. The site

should not have any steep slopes in the immediate vicinity and should not be

located near trees or buildings. A recommended site plan for the instrument is

shown in Fig. 3.2.

Figure 3.2 Plan of a meteorological station for the northern hemisphere (Shaw,

1994)

Page 67: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 58

__________________________________________________________________

.

3.2.1 Measurements of air and soil temperatures

In the ordinary Stevenson Screen, for example, two vertically hung thermometers

are for direct reading of the air temperature (dry bulb) and the reading of the wet

bulb, covered with muslin kept moist by a wick leading from a small reservoir of

distilled water. With these two temperature readings the dew point, vapor pressure

and relative humidity of the air are obtained. Supported horizontally are

maximum and minimum thermometers. The four thermometers are read at 0800

A.M. each day and at this time the maximum and minimum thermometers are

reset. Soil and ground/grass temperature measurements are often taken using soil

and earth/grass thermometers.

The dry and wet bulb temperatures are measured using psychrometers. Most

common are those using two mercury thermometers, one of them having the bulb

covered with a wick saturated with distilled water, and which measures a

temperature lowered due to the evaporative cooling. When they are naturally

ventilated inside a shelter, problems can arise if air flow is not sufficient to

maintain an appropriate evaporation rate and associated cooling. The Assmann

psychrometer has a forced ventilation of the wet bulb and dry bulb thermometers.

The dry and wet bulb temperature can be measured by thermocouples or by

thermistors, the so called thermocouple psychrometers and thermo sound

psychrometers. These psychrometers are used in automatic weather stations and,

when properly maintained and operated, provide very accurate measurements.

3.2.2 Sunshine recorder

A standard Campbell-Stockes sunshine recorder is shown in Fig. 3.3. The

working principle is that the glass sphere focuses the Sun's rays on to a specially

treated calibrated card where they burn a trace. The accumulated lengths of burnt

trace gives a measure of the total length of bright sunshine in hours.

Page 68: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 59

__________________________________________________________________

.

Figure 3.3 Sunshine hour recorder Mk. 2 (Campbell - Stokes)

Page 69: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 60

__________________________________________________________________

.

3.2.3 Wind speed and direction recorder

A cup anemometer is fixed on a 2 m long pole from the ground and the electrical

recording apparatus is housed conveniently away from the installation. The cup

anemometer can give instantaneous readings of wind velocity (m/s) or provide a

run-of-the-wind a collective distance in km when the counter is read each day

(Figure 3.4).

Figure 3.4 NMSA 1st class meteorological station housed in the cumpus of the

Alemaya University (Photo 2001).

Wind speeds measured at different heights above the soil surface are different.

Surface friction tends to slow down wind passing over it. Wind speed is slowest at

Cup generator anemometer

Page 70: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 61

__________________________________________________________________

.

the surface and increases with height. For this reason anemometers are placed at a

chosen standard height, i.e., 10 m in meteorology and 2 or 3 m in

agrometeorology. For the calculation of evapotranspiration, wind speed measured

at 2 m above the surface is required. To adjust wind speed data obtained from

instruments placed at elevations other than the standard height of 2m, a

logarithmic wind speed profile may be used for measurements above a short

grassed surface:

(3.16)

where:

u2 = wind speed at 2 m above ground surface [m/s],

uz =measured wind speed at z m above ground surface [m/s],

z = height of measurement above ground surface [m].

Classes of mean monthly wind speed are (1) les than 1 m/s light wind, (2)

between 1 and 3 m/s light to moderate wind, (3) from 3 to 5 m/s moderate to

strong wind, and (4) above 5 m/s strong wind. Where no wind data are available

within the region, a value of 2 m/s can be used as a temporary estimate. This

value is the average over 2000 weather stations around the globe.

3.2.4. Dew point temperature measurement

Dew point temperature is often measured with a mirror like metallic surface that

is artificially cooled. When dew forms on the surface, its temperature is sensed as

Tdew. Other dew sensor systems use chemical or electric properties of certain

materials that are altered when absorbing water vapour. Instruments for

measuring dew point temperature require careful operation and maintenance and

are seldom available in weather stations. The accuracy of estimation of the actual

vapour pressure from Tdew is generally very high.

3.2.5 Measurement of evaporation and evapotranspiration

Pan evaporation measurement

A practical way to measure evaporation directly is by the use of an evaporation

Page 71: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 62

__________________________________________________________________

.

pan. The pan exposes free water surface to the air, and the evaporation rate is

determined by measuring the water loss during one time period, usually one day.

Due to the difference in area of exposure and surrounding meteorological

conditions, evaporation from lakes is less than from the one obtained from the pan

measurement (with annual average multiplying factor about 0.7).

The National Weather Service Class A pan is recommended by the World

Meteorological Organization as a standard instrument for evaporation

measurements. The Class A pan is made of unpainted galvanized iron, has a

diameter of 122 cm and a height of 25.4 cm and is mounted about 15 cm above

the ground on supports which permit free flow of air around and under the pan

(Figure 3.5).

Figure 3.5 Class A evaporation pan

Water loss is determined by daily measurements of water level using a

micrometer hook gage installed in a stilling well set inside the pan. The pan is

initially filled to a height of 20 cm and is refilled when the water level has fallen

below 17.5 cm. Daily evaporation is computed as the difference between two

Page 72: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 63

__________________________________________________________________

.

successive observations, corrected to account for any intervening precipitation

measured in a nearby gage. An alternative procedure is to add a measured amount

of water daily to bring the water level in the pan up to a fixed point in the stilling

well. This procedure permits a more accurate measurement of water loss and

assures that the pan has the proper water level at all times.

Little is know about the spatial variability of evaporation. For general purpose and

preliminary evaporation estimates, a density of one station per 5000 km2 appears

to be sufficient.

Indirect measurement of evapotranspiration based on water balances of

watersheds and lakes:

A basic water balance equation, which is applied over a particular time interval,

is given by:

Where:

E = net evapotranspiration loss from the specified volume per unit area

(mm)

P = net precipitation (or irrigation) input to the specified volume per unit area

(mm)

VR = net volume of liquid water entering or leaving the specified volume as

measured inflow or outflow both above and below the surface (m3)

VS = change in liquid water stored within the specified volume (m3)

VL = “leakage,”, i.e., that total volume of liquid water leaving the specified

volume which is not, or cannot be, measured, and which therefore represents an

error in the method (m3)

A = effective area of the sample volume at the land surface (m2)

River runoff is arguably the most accurate hydrologic measurement and is a

valuable, direct determination of the available surface water resource. Careful

gauging can provide stream-flow measurements accurate to about 2 %. Using

carefully selected and well-managed paired watersheds can provide valuable and

convincing evidence of the consequences of land-use change on

evapotranspiration.

AV VVP= E LSR /)(*1000 (3.17)

Page 73: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 64

__________________________________________________________________

.

A systematic uncertainty in the evaporation loss deduced from a catchment water

balance arises from the possibility that the unmeasured leakage forms a

significant part of the total water balance.

Lysimeters. A lysimeter is a device in which a volume of soil, typically 0.5 to 2.0

m in diameter, which may be planted with vegetation, is isolated hydrologically

so that leakage VL = 0 in Eq. (3.11). It either permits measurement of drainage VR

or makes it zero and, in the case of a weighing lysimeter, the change in water

storage VS is determined by weight difference. If evapotranspiration from the

lysimeter is to be representative of the surrounding area, it should contain an

undisturbed sample of the soil and vegetation.

3.3 Methods for estimating potential evaporation

Potential Evaporation E0 (mm/day) defined as the quantity of water evaporated

per unit area, per unit time from an idealized extensive free water surface under

existing atmospheric conditions. Potential Evaporation of a given area varies

daily, and is following the variations of the weather.

The three common methods of estimating evaporation will be discussed herein:

the energy balance method, the aerodynamic method, and the combination

method.

3.3.1 The energy balance method

This method is widely used for estimating the amount of evaporation from a large

body of water such as lakes, reservoirs etc.

Consider an evaporation pan of a circular tank containing water, in which the rate

of evaporation is measured by the rate of fall of the water surface (Er = -dh/dt).

Based on the continuity and energy equation, one can derive the energy balance

equation for evaporation as

G) - H - R( l

1 = E sn

wv

r

(3.18)

Page 74: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 65

__________________________________________________________________

.

If the sensible heat flux Hs (sensible heat loss to surroundings atmosphere to raise

the temperature) and the ground heat flux G are both zero, then an evaporation

rate Er can be calculated as the rate at which all the incoming net radiation is

absorbed by evaporation:

where lv = latent heat of vaporization (J/kg), [lv (kJ/kg) = 2500 - 2.36 T (oC) up

to 40 OC]

w = water density (kg/m3)

Rn = net radiation (W/m2)

Er = rate of evaporation (m/s)

Example 3.2 Calculate by the energy method the evaporation rate from an open water

surface, if the net radiation is 200 W/m2

and the air temperature is 25 C, assuming no

sensible heat or ground heat flux.

Solution: The latent heat of vaporization at 25 C is lv = 2500-2.36*25 =2441 kJ/kg.

Density of water at 25 C is 997 kg/m3

Net radiation estimation

Radiometer or actinometer measures radiant energy received by the ground. For

most studies of evaporation, incident all-wave radiation data are adequate because

wv

nr

l

R = E (3.19)

mm/day 7.10=

mm/day 86400*1000*O1*8.22=

10*8.22=

997*1000*2441

100=

l

R = E

8-

8-

wv

nr

Page 75: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 66

__________________________________________________________________

.

the reflectivity of water is nearly constant (average daily values of 5 and 3 %,

short and long wave respectively).

The net radiation Rn is the net input of radiation at the surface at any instant. It is

the difference between the radiation absorbed Ri (1 -) where Ri is the incident

radiation, and that emitted Re.

= albedo, it is the fraction of reflected radiation, for deep water bodies is

about 0.08 because deep water bodies absorb most of the radiation they receive,

and for grass land and a range of agricultural crops = 0.23. In contrast fresh

snow reflects most of the incoming radiation with as high as 0.9, see Table 3.1.

Table 3.1 Plausible values for daily mean short wave radiation reflection coefficient

(Albedo) for broad land cover classes (Maidement, 1993)

Land cover class Short-wave radiation

Reflection coefficient

Open water 0.08

Tall forest 0.11 - 0.16

Tall farm crops (e.g., sugarcane) 0.15 - 0.20

Cereal crops (e.g., wheat) 0.20 - 0.26

Short farm crops (e.g. sugar beet) 0.20 - 0.26

Grass and pasture 0.20 - 0.26

Bare soil 0.10 wet - 0.35 dry

In the absence of measured solar radiation data, the total incoming short-wave

radiation can in most cases be estimated from measured sunshine hours according

to the following empirical relationship:

Where:

n/N = cloudiness fraction

n = bright sunshine hours per day, h

N = total day length, h

R - ) - (1R = R ein (3.20)

oi SN

n = R )61.035.0( (3.21)

Page 76: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 67

__________________________________________________________________

.

So = extraterrestrial radiation, MJ m2 day

-1 (Table 3.2)

Table 3.2 Mean solar radiation for cloudless skies, So (MJm -2

day-2

)

Lat.

Deg

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec

0 28.18 29.18 30.02 28.47 26.92 26.25 26.67 27.76 29.60 29.60 28.47 26.80

10 25.25 26.63 29.43 29.60 29.60 29.31 29.43 28.76 29.60 28.05 25.83 24.41

20 21.65 25.00 28.18 30.14 31.40 31.82 31.53 30.14 28.47 25.83 22.48 20.50

30 17.46 21.65 25.96 29.85 32.11 33.20 32.66 30.44 26.67 22.48 18.30 16.04

40 12.27 17.04 22.90 28.34 32.11 33.49 32.66 29.18 23.73 18.42 13.52 10.76

Net long-wave radiation.- There is a significant exchange of radiation energy

between the earth's surface and the atmosphere in the form of radiation at longer

wave lengths, i.e., in the range 3 to 100 m. Both the ground and the atmosphere

emit black-body radiation with a spectrum characteristics of their temperature.

Since the surface is on average warmer than the atmosphere, there is usually a net

loss of energy as thermal radiation from the ground.

The exchange of long-wave radiation Ln between vegetation and soil on the one

hand and atmosphere and clouds on the other, can be represented by the following

radiation law:

Where

Lo = outgoing long-wave radiation (ground to atmosphere), MJm2day

-1

Li = incoming long-wave radiation (atmosphere to ground), MJm2day

-1

f = adjustment for cloud cover

= net emissivity between the atmosphere and the ground

= the Stefan Boltzmann constant = 4.903x10-9 M J m

-2 day

-1 K

-4 = 5.67*10

-8 W/m

2.K

4

T = the absolute air temperature of the evaporating surface in degrees Kelvin (C +273)

The net emissivity can be estimated from

TfLL = L4

oin (3.22)

Page 77: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 68

__________________________________________________________________

.

where: a and b = correlation coefficients, a lies in the range 0.34 to 0.44,

and b in the range -0.14 to -0.25.

ed = saturated vapor pressure at dew temperature (kPa)

Adjustment for cloudiness f factor may be estimated from:

Where n/N = ratio of actual to possible hours of sunshine

Note that for general purposes when only sunshine hours, temperature, and

humidity data are available, net radiation (MJ m2 day

-1 ) can be estimated by the

following equation:

Where:

Rn = Net radiation ((MJ m2 day

-1 )

= albedo from Table 3.1

n/N= ratio of actual to possible hours of sunshine

S0 = mean solar radiation from cloudless sky from Table 3.2 (MJ m2 day

-1 )

ed = saturated vapor pressure at dew temperature (kPa)

= the Stefan Boltzmann constant = 4.903x10-9

M J m-2

day--1

K-4

T = the absolute air temperature of the evaporating surface in degrees Kelvin (C +

273)

Rn can be expressed as an equivalent depth of evaporated water in mm by

dividing Rn by w, where w (kg/m3) and (MJ/kg).

eba d (3.23)

N

nf 1.09.0 (3.24)

TeN

nS

N

nR 4

don )14.034.0)(1.09.0()61.035.0)(1( (3.25)

Page 78: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 69

__________________________________________________________________

.

3.3.2. Aerodynamic method

Besides the supply of heat energy, the second factor controlling the evaporation rate from

an open water surface is the ability to transport water vapor away from the evaporative

surface. The transport rate is governed by the humidity gradient in the air near the surface

and the wind speed across the surface. The equation for aerodynamic method is

Where:

Ea = Evaporation estimated by aerodynamic method (m/s)

(multiply by [1000 mm/m *86400 s /day] to get in mm/day)

es = saturation vapor pressure at the ambient temperature T (Pa)

ea = ed = actual vapor pressure estimated using dew point temperature Td or by

multiplying es by the relative humidity Rh (Pa)

B = the vapor transfer coefficient (m Pa-1

s-1

)

k = the Von Karman constant = 0.4

u2 = the wind velocity (m/s) measured at height z2 (cm) and z0 is from Table 3.3

a = density of moist air (kg/m3 )

a = density of water (kg/m3 )

p = atmospheric pressure in Pa

])z/z([p

uk0.622=B

where

)e - e( B = E

2

02w

2a

2

aasa

ln

(3.26)

Page 79: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 70

__________________________________________________________________

.

Table 3.3 A proximate values of the roughness height of natural surface.

Surface

Roughness height Z0 (cm)

ice, mud flats 0.001

water 0.01-0.06

Grass (up to 10 cm high) 0.1 - 2.0.

Grass (10 -50 cm high) 2 -5

vegetation (1 - 2 m high) 20

trees ( 10-15 m high ) 40-70

Example3.3 Calculate the evaporation rate from open water surface by the aerodynamic

method with air temperature 25C, the relative humidity 40 %, air pressure 101.3 kPa,

and wind speed 3 m/s, all measured at height 2m above the water surface. Assume a

roughness height zo = 0.03 cm.

Solution: The vapor transfer coefficient B is calculated using k = 0.4, a = 1.19 kg/m3

for

air at 25C, and density of water 997 kg/m3,

The evaporation rate is given by

at 25C, es = 3167 Pa and ea = Rh eas = 0.4 * 3167 = 1267 Pa

Ea = 4.54*10 -11

(3167 - 1267) = 8.62*10 -8

m/s

m/(Pa.s)10*4.54 =

])10*(2/3[*997*10*101.3

3*1.19*40.*0.622=

])z/z([p

uk0.622 = B

11-

24-3

2

2

02w

2a

2

ln

ln

)e - eB( = E aasa

Page 80: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 71

__________________________________________________________________

.

= 8.62 *10 -8 * (1000 mm/m)(86400 s /day)

Ea =7.45 mm/day

3.3.3. Combined aerodynamic and energy balance method - the combination method:

Evaporation may be computed by the aerodynamic method when energy supply is not

limiting and by the energy balance method when vapor transport is not limiting. But,

normally both of these factors are limiting, so a combination of the two methods is

needed. It is given by:

where:

= the gradient of the saturated vapor pressure curve at air temperature = des/dT,

(Pa/oC) and is

= 66.8 (Pa / C), pscychrometric constant,

Er and Ea = evaporation rate calculated based on energy balance, and aerodynamic

methods respectively (mm/day).

Example 3.5 Use the combination method to calculate the evaporation rate from an open

surface subject to net radiation of 200 W/m2, air temperature 25 C, relative humidity

40%, and wind speed 3 m/s, all recorded at height 2m, and atmospheric pressure 101.3 kPa.

Solution: The evaporation rate corresponding to net radiation of 200 W/m2 is Er = 7.10

mm/day, and for the aerodynamic method is yields Ea = 7.45 mm/day. The combination

method requires values for and .

E +

+ E +

= E ar

(3.27)

)T + (237.3

e 4098 =

2

as (3.28)

CPa/ 67.1 = 10*2441*0.622

10*101.3*1.*1005=

3

3

Page 81: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 72

__________________________________________________________________

.

the gradient of the saturated vapor pressure curve at 25oC with eas =32167 Pa for T

25oC

mm/day 7.2 = 7.45*67.1 + 188.7

67.1 + 7.10*

67.1 + 887.7

1887.7=

,E +

+ E +

= E ar

3.4 Evapotranspiration

Evapotranspiration is the combination of evaporation from the soil surface and

transpiration from vegetation. The same factors governing open water evaporation

also govern evapotranspiration, namely energy supply and vapor transport. In

addition, a third factor enters the picture: the supply of moisture at thee

evaporative surface. As the soil dries out, the rate of evapotranspiration drops

below the level it would have maintained in a well watered soil.

The combination method will give good estimate of reference crop

evapotranspiration that is for the rate of evapotranspiration from an extensive

surface of 8 cm to 15 cm tall green grass cover uniform height, actively growing,

completely shading the ground and not short of water.

The potential evapotranspiration of another crop growing under the same

conditions as the reference crop* is calculated by multiplying the reference crop

evapotranspiration Etr by crop coefficient kc, the value of which changes with the

stage of growth of the crop. The actual evapotranspiration Et is found by

multiplying the potential evapotranspiration by a soil coefficient ks ( 0 < ks < 1).

Ekk = E trcst . The values of the crop coefficient KC vary over a range of about (

0.2 < kc < 1.3).

forair J/kg.K 1005 = C 1.00, = K

K ,

Kl0.622

p KC = p

w

h

wv

hp

CPa/ 187.7 = )25 + (237.3

3167*4098 =

)T + (237.3

e

22

s 4098

Page 82: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 73

__________________________________________________________________

.

Note that reference crop evapotranspiration Etr can also be estimated by Penman-

Monteith method:

where:

E tr = reference crop evaporation (mm/day)

Rn = net radiation ar crop surface (MJ/m2/d)

G = soil heat flux (MJ/m2/d)

T = average temperature (oC)

U2 = wind speed measured at 2 m height (m/s)

(es - ea) = vapor pressure deficit (kPa)

= slope of vapor pressure curve (kPa/oC) = hygrometric constant (kPa/

oC)

G = 0.4 (T month n mean temperature O

C - T month n-1 mean temperature o

C)

900 = conversion factor

Sometimes Etr is called PET (potential evapotranspiration) although this often

refers to the evapotranspiration of a specific crop. Open water evaporation from

reservoirs may be estimated by multiplying Etr by a factor of 1.2. Estimated

monthly PET over the Tekeze, Awash and Rift Valley, Abay, Dedisa and Dabus,

Wabi Shebele and Genale Dawa, Omo Gibe, and Baro akobo are given in Annex

3.1.

3.5. Analysis of the homogeneity of meteorological data series

Weather data collected at a given weather station during a period of several years

may be not homogeneous, i.e., the data set representing a particular weather

variable may present a sudden change in its mean and variance in relation to the

original values. This phenomenon may occur due to several causes, some of

which are related to changes in instrumentation and observation practices, and

others which relate to modification of the environmental conditions of the site,

such as rapid urbanization or, on the contrary, perhaps development of irrigation

in the area.

Changes relative to data collection may be caused by:

)U0.34 + (1 +

)e - e(U273 + T

900 + G) - R(0.408

= E2

as2n

tr

(3.29)

Page 83: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 74

__________________________________________________________________

.

i. change in type of sensor or instrument;

ii. change in the observer and or change in the timing of observations;

iii. "sleeping" data collector;

iv. deterioration of sensors, such as with some types of pyranometers and RH

sensors, or mal-functioning of mechanical parts, such as with a tipping

bucket rain gauge, or by an intermittently broken or snorted wire;

v. aging of bearings on anemometers;

vi. use of incorrect calibration coefficients;

vii. variation in power supply or electronic behavior of instruments;

viii. growth of trees or planting of tall crops or construction of buildings or

fences near a raingauge, anemometer, or evaporation pan;

ix. change in the location of the weather station, or in the types of shelters for

housing temperature and humidity sensors;

x. change in the watering, type or maintenance of vegetation in the vicinity of

the weather station;

xi. significant change in the watering or type of vegetation of the region

surrounding the weather station.

These changes cause observations made prior to the change to belong to a

statistically different population than data collected after the change. It is

therefore necessary to apply appropriate techniques to evaluate whether a given

data set can be considered to be homogeneous and, if not, to introduce the

appropriate corrections. To do so requires the identification of which sub-data

series is to be corrected. To do this requires local information. Crop

evapotranspiration - Guidelines for computing crop water requirements - FAO

Irrigation and drainage paper 56 procedures are used in practice to check

homogeneity of the data (http://www.fao.org/docrep/X0490E).

Page 84: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Evaporation 75

__________________________________________________________________

.

3.6 Practice Problems

3.1 The following mean meteorological data are obtained at an altitude of 2457 m amsl

in the northern part of Ethiopia. Calculate the reference crop evapotranspiration by (a) the

combination method and (b) the Penman Monteith method.

Month

Min Temp. OC

Max. Temp. OC

Humidity

%

Wind at

2m

km/day

Net radiation

MJ/m2/day

Jan 4.9 24.1 56 130 21.5

June 9.2 26.9 38 164 25.8

July 10.7 23.3 54 156 21.7

August 9.8 22.8 72 156 21.6

December min and max temperature are 4.2 and 23 OC. May min and max temperature

are 9.4 and 25.8 OC. Assume p at sea level is 102 kPa for the average temperature of 28

oC.

3.2 Use the combination method to calculate the evaporation rate from an open surface

subject to net radiation of 220 W/m2, air temperature 20 C, relative humidity 65%, and

wind speed 4 m/s, all recorded at height 2m, and atmospheric pressure 102.3 kPa.

3.3 If a dam is constructed in the climatic area described in Problem 1, determine

evaporation loss (million m3) in Jan, June, July and August. Take the average reservoir

area as 150 km2.

3.4 Estimate actual evapotranspiration for cotton in mid season stage in April at Amibara,

Ethiopia. Mean maximum temperature = 36 OC, mean minimum temperature = 22

OC,

men dew point temperature = 9 OC, mean wind speed = 1.5 m/s, mean percentage of

possible sunshine = 94 %, elevation = 300 m, and assume G = 0.0.

3.5 Calculate the daily evaporation rate from an open water surface under the following

climatic condition: incident radiation is 250 W/m2, mean air temperature is 35

oC,

mean relative humidity is 35 %, mean wind speed is 1.5 m/s, mean density of air is 1.0 kg/m

3, air pressure is 100 kPa, all measured at 2 m height. Furthermore, the

roughness height of water is 0.03, the albedo of water is 0.09, the emissivity of water

is 0.97, Stefan Boltzmann constant is 5.67 *10 –8

W/(m2.K

4 ).

Page 85: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 76

76

Page 86: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 77

77

4. INFILTRATION

Infiltration is the process of water entry into a soil from rainfall, or irrigation. Soil

water movement (percolation) is the process of water flow from one point to

another point within the soil. Infiltration rate is the rate at which the water

actually infiltrates through the soil during a storm and it must be equal the

infiltration capacities or the rainfall rate, which ever is lesser. Infiltration capacity

the maximum rate at which a soil in any given condition is capable of absorbing

water.

The rate of infiltration is primarily controlled by the rate of soil water movement

below the surface and the soil water movement continues after an infiltration

event, as the infiltrated water is redistributed.

Infiltration and percolation play a key role in surface runoff, groundwater

recharge, evapotranspiration, soil erosion, and transport of chemicals in surface

and subsurface waters.

4.1 Factors affecting infiltration

Infiltration rates vary widely. It is dependent on the condition of the land surface

(cracked, crusted, compacted etc), land vegetation cover, surface soil

characteristics (grain size & gradation), storm characteristics (intensity, duration

& magnitude), surface soil and water temperature, chemical properties of the

water and soil.

surface and soil factors

The surface factors are those affect the movement of water through the air-soil

interface. Cover material protect the soil surface. A bare soil leads to the

formation of a surface crust under the impact of raindrops or other factors, which

breakdown the soil structure and move soil fines into the surface or near-surface

pores. Once formed, a crust impedes infiltration.

Figure 4.1 illustrates that the removal of the surface cover (straw or burlap)

reduces the steady-state infiltration rate from approximately 3 to 4 cm/hr to less

than 1 cm/hr. Figure 4.2 illustrates the difference between crusted, tilled, grass

cover soil on the infiltration curve. The bare tilled soil has higher infiltration than

Page 87: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 78

78

a crusted soil initially; however, its steady-state rate approaches that of the crusted

soil because a crust is developing. Also, the grass-covered soil has a higher rate

than a crusted soil partially because the grass protects the soil from crusting.

Natural processes such as soil erosion or man-made processes such as tillage, overgrazing

and deforestation can cause change in soil surface configurations.

Figure 4.1 Effect of covered and bare soil on infiltration rates (Maidment, 1993)

Page 88: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 79

79

Figure 4.2 Effect of surface sealing and crusting on infiltration rates (Maidment, 1993)

The soil properties affecting soil water movement are hydraulic conductivity (a

measure of the soil’s ability to transmit water) and water-retention characteristics

(the ability of the soil to store and release water). These soil water properties are

closely related to soil physical properties.

Soil physical properties include particle size properties and morphological

properties. Particle-size properties are determined from the size distribution of

individual particles in a soil sample. Soil particles smaller than 2 mm are divided

into three soil texture groups: sand, silt, and clay. The morphological properties

having the greatest effect on soil water properties are bulk density, organic matter,

and clay type. These properties are closely related to soil structure and soil surface

area. Bulk density is defined as the ratio of the dry solid weight to the soil bulk

volume. The bulk volume includes the volume of the solids and the pore space.

Page 89: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 80

80

4.2 Measurements of infiltration

Infiltration is a very complex process, which can vary temporally and spatially.

Selection of measurement techniques and data analysis techniques should

consider these effects, and their spatial dimensions can categorize infiltration

measurement techniques. A brief introduction of infiltration measurement

techniques are described below.

4.2.1 Areal measurement

Areal infiltration estimation is accomplished by analysis of rainfall-runoff data

from a watershed. For a storm with a single runoff peak, the procedure resembles

that of the calculation of a index (see section 4.3.2). The rainfall hyetograph is

integrated to calculate the total rainfall volume. Likewise, the runoff hydrograph

is integrated to calculate the runoff volume. The infiltration volume is obtained by

subtracting runoff volume from rainfall volume. The average infiltration rate is

obtained by dividing infiltration volume by rainfall duration.

4.2.2 Point measurement

Point infiltration measurements are normally made by applying water at a specific site to

a finite area and measuring the intake of the soil. There are four types of infiltrometers:

the ponded-water ring or cylinder type, the sprinkler type, the tension type, and the

furrow type. An infiltrometer should be chosen that replicates the system being

investigated. For example, ring infiltrometers should be used to determine infiltration

rates for inundated soils such as flood irrigation or pond seepage. Sprinkler infiltrometers

should be used where the effect of rainfall on surface conditions influences the

infiltration rate. Tension infiltrometers are used to determine the infiltration rates of soil

matrix in the presence of macropores. Furrow infiltrometers are used when the effect of

flowing water is important, as in furrow irrigation.

Ring or Cylinder Infiltrometers

These infiltrometers are usually metal rings with a diameter of 30 to 100 cm and a

height of 20 cm. The ring is driven into the ground about 5 cm, water is applied

inside the ring with a constant-head device, and intake measurements are recorded

until a constant rate of infiltration is attained. To help eliminate the effect of

Page 90: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 81

81

lateral spreading use a double-ring infiltrometer, which is a ring infiltrometer with

a second larger ring around it.

Sprinkler infiltrometer - Rain simulator

With the help of rain simulator, water is sprinkled at a uniform rate in excess of

the infiltration capacity, over a certain experimental area. The resultant runoff R is

observed, and from that the infiltration f using f = (P-R)/t. Where P = Rain

sprinkled, R = runoff collected, and t = duration of rainfall.

Example 4.1: A USGS rain-simulator infiltrometer experiment was conducted on

a sandy loam soil. Rainfall was simulated at the rate of 20 cm/hr. The rainfall and

runoff data are given in Table ….

(a) Find and plot the mass-infiltration curve from the experimental data.

(b) Plot an infiltration rate curve.

Table E4.1. Rain-simulator infiltrometer data and infiltration capacity

calculation.

Solution. The measured data are given in Columns 1, 3 and 4. Cumulative

infiltration F is calculated by subtracting the cumulative runoff from the

cumulative rainfall. Infiltration rate is then determined by dividing the F by the

total duration of infiltration. The result is plotted in Figure E4.1.

Rainfall rate 20

Elapsed Time Simulated Measured F f

Time (1)/60 rainfall runoff (3)-(4) (5)/(2)

(min) (hr) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm/hr)

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.000 11.00

5 0.08 1.67 0.84 0.827 9.92

10 0.17 3.33 1.76 1.573 9.44

15 0.25 5.00 2.76 2.240 8.96

20 0.33 6.67 3.77 2.897 8.69

25 0.42 8.33 4.85 3.483 8.36

30 0.50 10.00 5.93 4.070 8.14

60 1.00 20.00 13.27 6.730 6.73

90 1.50 30.00 21.15 8.850 5.90

120 2.00 40.00 29.33 10.670 5.34

150 2.50 50.00 37.87 12.130 4.85

Page 91: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 82

82

Figure E4.1. Infiltration rate and cumulative infiltration variation with time.

4.3 Estimating infiltration rate

In the following section four infiltration methods are discussed, that is the Horton

Infiltration, the -index, the Philip infiltration and the Green -Ampt infiltration

equations.

4.3.1 Horton infiltration

In general, for a given constant storm, infiltration rates tend to decrease with time.

The initial infiltration rate is the rate prevailing at the beginning of the storm and

is maximum. Infiltration rates gradually decrease in time and reach a constant

value.

Horton observed the above facts and concluded that infiltration begins at some

rate f o and exponentially decreases until it reaches a constant fc. He proposed the

following infiltration equation where rainfall intensity i greater than fp at all times.

0.00

2.00

4.00

6.00

8.00

10.00

12.00

0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00

Time (hr)

Infi

ltra

tio

n r

ate

(c

m/h

r)

0.00

2.00

4.00

6.00

8.00

10.00

12.00

14.00

Cu

mm

ula

tiv

e In

filt

rati

on

(c

m)

Infiltration rate

Cumulative Infiltration

e )f - f( + f = f -kt

c0cp (4.1)

Page 92: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 83

83

where:

fp = infiltration capacity in mm/hr at any time t

fo = initial infiltration capacity in mm/hr

fc = final constant infiltration capacity mm/hr at saturation, dependent on soil type

and vegetation

t = time in hour from the beginning of rainfall

k = an exponential decay constant dependent on soil type and vegetation.

Note that infiltration takes place at capacity rates only when the intensity of

rainfall i equals or exceeds fp; that is f =fp when i fp, but when i < fp, f < fp and f

= i.

The cumulative infiltration equation F(t) for the Horton method is found from the

relationship d(F(t)/dt = f(t) = fp and is given by

k

e)f - f(+ tf tF

-kt

c0

c

)1()(

(4.2)

Indicative values for fo, fc, and K are given in Table 4.1.

Table 4.1: estimated values of Horton parameters

Soil / cover complex fo

(mm/hr)

fc

(mm/hr)

K

(1/hr)

Standard agricultural (bare) 280 6 – 220 1.6

Standard agricultural

(vegetated)

900 20 – 290 .8

Peat 325 2 – 29 1.8

Fine sandy clay (bare) 210 2 – 25 2.0

Fine sandy clay (vegetated) 670 10 – 30 1.4

Page 93: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 84

84

Example 4.2 The infiltration capacities of a given soil at different intervals of time are

measured and values are given in Table E4.1. Find an equation for the infiltration

capacity

Table E4.1.

Time (hr) 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00

fp (cm/hr) 10.4 5.6 3.2 2.1 1.5 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0

Solution The infiltration capacity reaches a constant value equals to fc = 1.0 cm/hr. Now

plotting log 10 (fp - fc) with t on linear scale and estimating slope of the line m = -1/1.31.

Time (hr)

0

5

10

15

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5

time (hr)

f

-4

-2

0

2

4

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5

time (hr)

log

(fp

- fc

)

From this m =-1/1.31= -1/ (k log10e), k = 3.02. Thus the infiltration equation is given by

fp = 1.0 + (10.4 -1.0) e -3.02 t

= 1.0 + 9.4 e -3.02t

Page 94: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 85

85

4.3.2 The -index method

The -index is the simplest method and is calculated by finding infiltration as a

difference between gross rainfall and observed surface runoff. The -index

method assumes that the loss is uniformly distributed across the rainfall pattern.

Example 4.3 Estimate -index of the catchment having an area 2.26 km2.The observed

runoff caused by the rainfall given in the Table E4.2 is 282 097 m3.

Table E4.2:

Time (hr) Rainfall (mm/hr)

00 to 2 35.6

2 to 5 58.4

5 to 7 27.9

7 to 10 17.8

10 to 12 7.6

Solution: First the rainfall hyetograph is graphed. The runoff depth rd is then calculated

runoff depth = 282097/(2.26*1000*1000) = 125 mm

0.0

10.0

20.0

30.0

40.0

50.0

60.0

70.0

00 to 2 2 to 5 5 to 7 7 to 10 10 to 12

Try -index value of 25 mm/hr, then the first three rainfall will be used in the

calculation. That is: (2*(35.6 –) + 3*(58.4-) + 2*(27.9-)) = 125. This will

give a value of 25 mm/hr. The calculated value crosses the three selected

rainfall intensity signifying that each of these intensities contributes to runoff. The

-index method gives better estimate when losses is calculated after heavy

rainfall and the soil profile is saturated.

4.3.3 The Phillip method

Page 95: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 86

86

Phillip proposed an equation to estimate cumulative infiltration F(t) by

(4.3)

Where:

S = sorpitivity which is a function of the soil suction potential (representing soil

suction head

K = the hydraulic conductivity of the soil (representing gravity head)

t = time from the beginning of the rainfall.

Noting that f(t) = dF(t)/dt, the Phillip equation for infiltration rate is

(4.4)

Example 4.4 A small tube with a cross-sectional area of 40 cm2 is filled with soil and

laid horizontally. The open end of the tube is saturated, and after 15 minutes, 100 cm3 of

water have infiltrated into the tube. If the saturated hydraulic conductivity of the soil is

0.4 cm/hr, determine how much infiltration would have taken place in 30 minutes if the

soil column had initially been placed upright with its surface saturated.

Solution The cumulative infiltration depth in the horizontal column is F = 100 cm3 / 40

cm2 . For horizontal infiltration, cumulative infiltration is a function of soil suction alone

so that after t = 15 min = 0.25 hr

F(t) = St1/2

, 2.5 = S(0.25) 1/2

S = 5 cm.hr(-1/2

For infiltration down a vertical column, the full equation is used with K = 0.4 cm/hr.

F(t) = St

1/2 + Kt

F(t) =5(0.5)1/2 + 0.4(.5)

=3.74 cm

4.3.4* The Green-Ampt method

The Green-Ampt model is an approximate model utilizing Darcy’s law. The

model is developed with the assumption that water is ponded on the ground

surface. Consider a vertical column of soil of unit horizontal cross-sectional area

KtSttF 5.0)(

KSttf 5.05.0)(

Page 96: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 87

87

and let a control volume be defined around the wet soil between the surface and

depth L.

ho WATER

y

L

Saturated soil

Wetting front

Dry soil

If the soil was initially of moisture content i throughout its entire depth, the

moisture content will increase from i to n (the porosity) as the wetting front

passes.

The increase in the water stored with in the control volume as a result of infiltration is

L(n- i ) = L for a unit cross-section. By definition the cumulative depth of

water infiltrated into the soil F is given by:

(4.5)

Now from Darcy’s law

(4.6)

And in this case q = -f because q is positive upward while f is positive downward.

Eq.(4.6) can be written as

(4.7)

Here the head at h1 is h0 and the head at the dry soil below the wetting front h2 = -

-L.

(4.8)

)()( inLtF

z

hKq

)(21

21

zz

hhKf

)())(

( 0

L

LK

L

LhKf

Page 97: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 88

88

h0 is negligible if it is assumed that ponded water becomes surface runoff.

Replacing L by F(t)/() in (4.8), we get

(4.9)

And we know that dF/dt = f, thus we can develop the Green-Ampt equation for

F(t) and this is

(4.10)

and

(4.11)

Equation (4.10) is a non-linear equation in F. It may be solved by the method of

successive substitution in

(4.12)

Given K, t, and , a trial value of F is substituted on the right-hand side (a

good trial value is F = Kt), and a new value of F calculated on the left-hand side,

which is substituted as a trial value on the right-hand side, and so on, until the

calculated values of F converge to a constant.

Note that when the ponded depth ho is not negligible, the value -ho is substituted

for in Eqs. (4.10) and (4.11).

Parameters in the Green-Ampt model

To apply Green-Ampt model the effective hydraulic conductivity K, the wetting

front suction , the porosity n, and the initial moisture i need to be measured or

estimated. These parameters can be determined by fitting to experimental

)(F

FKf

KttF

tF

))(

1ln()(

)1)(

(

tF

Kf

))(

1ln()(

tF

KttF

Page 98: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 89

89

infiltration data, however, for specific application purposes it is easier to

determine the parameters from readily available data such as soils and land-use

data. Table 4.1 gives average values Green-Ampt parameters.

To incorporate the effects of land cover on infiltration, it is recommended to

divide the area into the following three categories: (1) the area which is bare and

outside the canopy cover, (2) the area which has ground cover, and (3) the bare

area under canopy, and to develop an effective hydraulic conductivity for each

area. Compute the infiltration separately for each area and then sum the three

infiltration amounts weighted to their areal cover to obtain the infiltration for the

area. This method of determining the infiltration assumes that the three areas do

not cascade. If the areas do cascade, this method over predicts infiltration.

Note that for bare ground cover conditions K = Ks/2, for the area which is bare

under canopy the effective hydraulic conductivity can be assumed to be equal to

the saturated hydraulic conductivity Ks of the soil.

The area which has ground cover is assumed to contain macroporosity, and the

effective hydraulic conductivity is equal to the saturated hydraulic conductivity

Ks times a macroporosity factor A. For areas which don not undergo mechanical

disturbance like range land macroporosity factor A is determined from

Page 99: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 90

90

)032.004.0032.096.0exp( BDCSA

Table 4.1 USDA Soil Texture Green-Ampt Infiltration Parameters (Maidment, 1993)

Soil texture classes

Porosity n

Wetting front soil

suction head

(cm)

Saturated

hydraulic

conductivity

Ks (cm/hr)

Sand 0.437

(0.374-0.500)

4.95

(0.97-25.36)

23.56

Loamy sand 0.437 6.13 5.98

(0.363-506) (1.35-27.94)

Sandy loam 0.453

(0.351-0.555)

11.01

(2.67-45.47)

2.18

Loam 0.463

(0.375-0.551)

8.89

(1.33-59.38)

1.32

Silt loam 0.501

(0.420-0.582)

16.68

(2.92-95.39)

0.68

Sandy clay loam 0.398

(0.332-0.464)

21.85

(4.42-108.0)

0.30

Clay loam 0.464

(0.409-0.519)

20.88

(4.79-91.10)

0.20

Silty clay loam 0.471

(0.418-0.524)

27.30

(5.67-131.5)

0.20

Sandy clay 0.430

(0.370-0.490)

23.90

(4.08-140.2)

0.12

Silty clay 0.479

(0.425-0.533)

29.22

(6.13-139.4)

0.10

Clay 0.475

(0.427-0.523)

31.63

(6.39-156.5)

0.06

(4.13)

And for undisturbed agricultural areas A can be determined from

(4.14)

Where S = Percent sand

C = percent clay

BD = bulk density of the soil (< 2 mm), g/cc, and A > 1.0.

)94.1099.082.2(exp BDSA

Page 100: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 91

91

The area which is bare outside canopy is assumed to be crusted and the effective

hydraulic conductivity is equal to the saturated hydraulic conductivity Ks times a

crust factor CRC which is estimated by

(4.15)

where: CRC = crust factor

SC = correction factor for partial saturation of the soil subcrust (see Table 4.2)

= 0.736 – 0.0019 (percent sand)

i = matric potential drop at the crust-subcrust interface, cm (Table 4.2)

= 45.19 – 46.68 (SC)

L = wetting front depth, cm

Table4.2: Mean steady-state matric potential drop i across seals by soil texture

(Maidment 1993)

Soil texture Matric, potential

drop

i (cm)

Reduction factor for sub-

crust conductivity

SC

Sand 2 0.91

Loamy sand 3 0.89

Sandy loam 6 0.86

Loam 7 0.82

Silt loam 10 0.81

Sandy clay loam 5 0.85

Clay loam 8 0.82

Silty clay loam 10 0.76

Sandy clay 6 0.80

Silty clay 11 0.73

Clay 9 0.75

Example 4.4 Compute the infiltration rate f and cumulative infiltration F after one hour

of infiltration into a silt loam soil that initially had an effective saturation of 30 %.

Assume water is ponded to a small but negligible depth on the surface.

Solution:

For a silt loam soil = 16.7 cm, K =0.65 cm/hr, n = 0.501, i = 30% x 0.501

= n - i = 0.501- 30% x 0.501 = 0.35.

= 16.7 x 0.35 = 5.84 cm.

)/(1 L

SCCRC

i

Page 101: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 92

92

The cumulative infiltration at t = 1 hour is calculated employing Eq. (4.10), taking a trial

value of F(t) = Kt =0.65 cm.

= 1.27 cm

Substituting F = 1.27 cm in Eq(4.10) we get 1.79 cm and aftera number of iteration F

converges to a constant value of 3.17 cm.

Infiltration rate after one hour is estimated by Eq. (4.11)

= 1.81 cm/hr.

))(

1ln()(

tF

KttF

)68.5

65.01ln(68.51*65.0)1( F

)1)(

(

tF

Kf

)117.3

68.5(63.0 f

Page 102: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 93

93

4.4. Practice Problems

4.1 The infiltration rate as a function of time for silt loam are given below. Determine

the best values for the parameters fo, fc, and k for Horton's equation to describe the

infiltration of the silt loam soil at the locality.

Time in hrs 0 0.07 0.16 0.27 0.43 0.67 1.10 2.53

fp (mm/hr) 6.6 5.3 4.3 3.3 2.2 1.3 0.7 0.25

4.2 For clay soil at a given location parameters of Philip's equation were found as S = 45

cm/hr 0.5

, and K = 10 cm/hr. Determine the cumulative infiltration and the infiltration

rate at 0.5 hr increments for a 3-hour period. Plot both as functions of time. Assume

continuously ponded conditions.

4.3. For a sandy loam soil, calculate the infiltration rate (cm/hr) and depth of infiltration

(cm) after one hour if the effective saturation is initially 40 percent, using the Green-

Ampt method. Assume continuously ponded conditions.

4.4. Use the Green-Ampt method to evaluate the infiltration rate and cumulative

infiltration depth of a silty clay soil at 0.1 hour increments up to 6 hours from the

beginning of infiltration. Assume initial effective saturation 20 percent and continuous

ponding.

Page 103: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 94

94

5. STREAMFLOW MEASUREMENTS and HYDROGRAPH

Continuous streamflow records are necessary in the design of water supply

systems, in designing hydraulic structures, in the operation of water management

systems, and in estimating sediment or chemical loads of streams. To do these,

systematic records of stage and discharge are essential. This chapter elaborates

common methods practiced in Ethiopia to measure streamflow. The concept of

hydrograph is also discussed.

River stage is the elevation above some arbitrary zero datum of the water surface

at a streamflow gauging station. The datum is sometimes taken as mean sea level

but more often is slightly below the point of zero flow at the gauging station. The

elevation datum is set with reference to at least three permanent reference marks

or benchmarks located in stable ground separate from the recorder structure

following standard surveying work.

It is difficult to make a direct, continuous measurement of discharge in a stream

or river but relatively simple to obtain a continuous record of stage. Thus

measurements of river stage provides the best alternative. Before we discuss some

methods of measuring river stage, first we discuss criteria fort selecting a stream

gauging station.

5.1 Stream gauging site selection

The principles of network design and the proposed use of data should govern the

selection of streams to be gauged. Dense network of gauging station is required

for research works related to runoff estimation, soil erosion estimation, and water

balance calculation at different watershed sizes. Whereas the goal is to construct a

dam to impound water, light network of stream gauging stations is sufficient -

one station at or near the dam site can be adequate. A general-purpose network

must, however, provide the ability to estimate hydrological parameters over a

wide area using for example a regional regression model.

Despite the development of a variety of objectives and statistically based methods

for streamflow and rainfall network design, judgment and experience are still

Page 104: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 95

95

indispensable. The WMO Guide to Hydrological Practice recommendations for

network density as a staring point for network design is given in Table 5.1.

Table 5-1.Recommended minimum density of hydrometric stations

Type of region

Range of norms for

minimum network, area,

km2 per station

Range of provisional

norms tolerated in

difficult conditions area,

km2 per station

Flat regions of tropical,

temperate and

Mediterranean zones

1000 - 25000

3000 - 10000

Mountainous regions of

tropical, temperate and

Mediterranean zones

300 -100

1000 - 5000

Small mountainous

islands with very

irregular rainfall, very

dense stream network

140 - 300

Arid zone 5000 - 20000

5.1.1 Selection of gauging site

The selection of a particular site for the gauging station on a given stream should

be guided by the following criteria for an ideal gauge site (WMO 1981):

i. The general course of the stream is straight for about 100 meters upstream

and downstream from the gauging site.

ii. The total flow is confined into the channel at all stages and no flow

bypasses the site as sub-surface flow.

iii. The streambed is not subject to scour and fill and is free of aquatic growth.

iv. Banks are permanent, high enough to contain floods, and are free of brush.

v. Unchanging natural controls are present in the form of a bedrock outcrop

or other stable riffle for low flow, and a channel constriction for high flow,

or a fall or cascade that is un-submerged at all stages to provide a stable

Page 105: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 96

96

relation between stage and discharge. If no satisfactory natural low-water

control exists, a suitable site is available for installing an artificial control.

vi. A site is available, just upstream from the control, for housing the stage

recorder where the potential for damage by water-borne debris is minimal

during flood stages; the elevation of the stage recorder itself should be

above any floods likely to occur during the life of the station.

vii. The gauge site is far enough upstream from the confluence with another

stream.

viii. A satisfactory reach for measuring discharge at all stage is available

within reasonable proximity of the gauge site. It is not necessary that low

and high flows be measured at the same cross-section.

ix. The site is readily accessible for ease in installation and operation of the

gauging station.

x. Facilities for telemetry can be made available, if required.

xi. Typical streamflow gauging station installed in the Wabi Shebele river at

upstream fo Melka Wakana Dam is shown in Figure 5.1. In practice rarely

will an ideal site be found for a gauging station and judgement must be

exercised in choosing between possible sites. A gauging site should be

located at a point along the stream where there is a high correlation

between stage and discharge, featuring a one to one correspondence

between stage and discharge. Either section or channel control is

necessary for the rating to be single-valued.

xii. A rapid or fall located immediately downstream of gauging site forces

critical flow through it, providing a section control. In the absence of a

natural section control, an artificial control – for instance, a concrete weir

– can be built to force the rating being single-valued. This type of control

is very stable under low and average flow conditions.

xiii. A long downstream channel of relatively uniform cross-sectional shape,

constant slope, and bottom friction provides a channel control. However, a

Page 106: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 97

97

gauging site relying on channel control requires periodic re-calibration to

check its stability. To improve channel control, the gauging site should be

located far from downstream backwater effects caused by reservoirs and

large river confluence.

Figure 5-1: Typical streamflow gauging station installed in the Wabi river

near Dodola town upstream of the Melkawakana reservoir (February 2002).

5.2 Stage measurement

Basically there are two modes of stage measurements. The first is discrete stage

measurements using manual gauges, and the second is continuous stage

measurements using recorders. For the measurement of stage, uncertainties

should not be worse than 10 mm or 0.1 % of the range.

5.2.1 Manual gauge

The simplest way to measure river stage is by means of a staff gage. A staff gauge

is vertically attached to a fixed feature such as a bridge pier or a pile (Figure 5.2).

The scale is positioned so that all possible water levels can be read promptly and

accurately. Another type of manual gauge is the wire gauge. Wire gauge consists

of a reel holding a length of light cable with a weight affixed to the end of the

Page 107: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 98

98

cable. The reel is mounted in affixed position – for instance, on a bridge span –

and the water level is measured by unreeling the cable until the weight touches the

water surface. Each revolution of the reel unwinds a specific length of cable,

permitting the calculation of the distance to the water surface. Manual gages are

used where stages do not vary greatly form one measurement to another

measurement. They are impractical in small or flashy streams, where substantial

changes in stages may occur between readings.

5.2.1 Recording gauge

A recording gage measures stages continuously and records them on a strip chart.

The mechanism of a recording gauge is either float actuated or pressure actuated.

In a float actuated recorder, a pen recording the water level on a strip chart is

actuated by a float on the surface of the water. The recorder and float is housed on

suitable enclosure on the top of a stilling well connected to the stream by two

intake pipes (two intake pipes are used incase one of them become clogged)

(Figure 5.2). The stilling well protects the float from debris and ice and dampens

the effect of wave action. This type of gage is commonly used for continuous

measurements of water levels in rivers and lakes.

The pressured actuated recorder or the bubble gage senses the water level by

bubbling a continuous stream of gas (usually CO2) into the water. The bubble

gauge consists of a specially designed servo-manometer, gas-purge system, and

recorder. Nitrogen fed through a tube bubble freely into the stream through an

orifice positioned at a fixed location below the water surface. The pressure in the

tube, equal to that of the piezo-meteric head above the orifice, is transmitted to the

servo-manometer, which converts changes in pressure in the gas-purge system

into pen movements on a strip-chart recorder. Bubble-type water level sensors are

used in applications where a stilling well is either impractical or too expensive

and where the stream carries a heavy sediment load. The Awash river at Awash

town is equipped with pressured actuated recorder.

Page 108: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 99

99

Figure 5-2. The measurement of stage through manual methods and recording

instruments (after Gregory and Walling, 1973)

Page 109: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 100

100

Page 110: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 101

101

Figure 5-3: A typical chart from vertical float recorder.

Crest stage gage. This is used to obtain a record of flood crest at sites where

recording gages are not installed. A crest stage gage consists of a wooden staff

gage scale, situated inside a pipe that has small holes for the entry of water. A

small amount of cork is placed in the pipe, floats as the water rises, and adheres to

the staff or scale at the highest water level.

Telemetric gages. Gages with automatic data transmittal capabilities are called

self-reporting gages, or stage sensors. Self-reporting gauges are of the float-

actuated or pressure actuated type. These instruments use telemeters to broadcast

stage measurement in real time, from a stream gauging location to a central site.

This type of gauge is ideally suited for applications where speed of processing is

of utmost important, e.g., for operational hydrology or real-time flood forecasting.

Page 111: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 102

102

5.3 Flow velocity measurement and discharge computation

Flow velocity. The velocity of flow in a stream can be measured with a current

meter. Current meters are propeller devices (Figure 5.4) placed in the flow, the

speed with which the propeller rotates being proportional to the flow velocity.

Figure 5-4: Vertical and horizontal axis current meters and wading rod and cable

suspension mounting of the meter body.

Page 112: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 103

103

The relation between measured revolution per second of the meter cups N and

water

velocity V is given by

where:

a = the starting velocity or velocity required to overcome mechanical friction.

b = the constant of proportionality, and

Figure 5-5: Top: current meter mounted on a measuring rod, (bottom) suspended on a

cable from the bow of a jet-boat. Wide rivers flow (usually greater than 100 m) are often measured using a boat- the Baro river near Sudan border is the case in Ethiopia.

Initial values of a and b can be found from the calibration tables provided by the

manufacturer. With time the values of a and b are changing and regular

bN + a = V (5.1)

Page 113: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 104

104

recalibration is essential. This may be done by towing the current meter through

still water in a tank at a series of known velocities.

The current meter can be hand-held in the flow in a small stream (measurement

by wading), suspended from a bridge or cable way across a large stream, or

lowered from the bow of a boat (Figure 5.5).

Velocity distribution: The flow velocity varies with depth in a stream . Over the

cross-section of an open channel, the velocity distribution depends on the

character of the river banks and of the bed and on the shape of the channel. The

maximum velocities tend to be found just below the water surface and away from

the retarding friction of the banks.

The average velocity occurs say about 0.6 of the depth. It is standard practice to

measure velocity at 0.2 and 0.8 of the depth when the depth is more than 60 cm

and to average the two velocities to determine the average velocity for the vertical

section. For shallow rivers and near the banks on deeper rivers where the depths

are less than 0.6 m, velocity measurements are made at 0.6 of depth of flow.

Discharge computation.

The discharge computation of a stream is calculated from measurements of

velocity and depth. A marked line is stretched across the stream. At regular

intervals along the line, the depth of the water is measured with a graduated rod or

by lowering a weighted line from the surface to the stream bed, and the velocity is

measured using a current meter. The discharge Q at a cross-section of area A is

found by

(5.2)

Where V = streamflow velocity

A = cross sectional area of the flow

dAVQ .

Page 114: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 105

105

Figure 5-6. The velocity area technique of discharge measurements: a cable way is used

on large streams for positioning the current meter in the verticals and a special cable

drum can be used to obtain accurate readings of depth and spacing of verticals. The mean

section and mid-section methods are commonly used to compute the discharge of the individual segments.

Page 115: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 106

106

in which the integral is approximated by summing the incremental discharges

calculated from

each measurement i, i = 1, 2, ..., n of velocity Vi and depth di.

The measurements represent average values over width wi of the stream.

Example 5.1: Given the following stream gauging data, calculate the discharge.

Vertical No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Distance to refernce point (m) 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0 55.0 60.0 65.0

Sounding depth di (m) 0.0 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.5 2.5 3.0 2.0 1.2 2.7 2.9

Velocity at 0.2 di (m/s) 0.0 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.7 1.3 0.9 1.7 1.8

Velocity at 0.8 di (m/s) 0.0 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.1 1.3 1.0 0.7 1.3 1.4

Solution: To use Eq. (5.3) first the average velocity at each sounding depth is calculated,

then the partial width which is constant in this example is calculated (20-15) = 5 m

Vertical No. 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0

Distance to reference point (m) 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0 55.0 60.0 65.0

Sounding depth (m) 0.0 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.5 2.5 3.0 2.0 1.2 2.7 2.9

Velocity at 0.2 m (m/s) 0.0 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.7 1.3 0.9 1.7 1.8

Velocity at 0.8 m (m/s) 0.0 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.1 1.3 1.0 0.7 1.3 1.4

Average Velocity (m/s) 0.0 0.5 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.2 0.8 1.5 1.6

Partial area Ai (msq) 0.0 2.5 4.0 6.0 7.5 12.5 15.0 10.0 6.0 13.3 4.8

Partial discharge (m3/s) 0.0 1.1 2.6 4.8 7.5 15.6 22.5 11.5 4.8 19.5 7.6

Total Q = 97.58 (m3/s) Total A = 81.61 msq

Average velocity (m/s) = Q/ A = 1.196 m/s

-3.5

-3.0

-2.5

-2.0

-1.5

-1.0

-0.5

0.0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

WdV = Q iii

n

=1i

(5.3)

Page 116: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 107

107

5.4 Dilution gauging

Dilution gauging method of measuring the discharge in a stream is made by

adding a chemical solution or tracer of known concentration to the flow and then

measuring the dilution of the solution downstream where the chemical is

completely mixed with the stream water. A tracer is a substance that is not

normally present in the stream and that is not likely to be lost by chemical

reaction with other substances. Salt, fluorescein dye, and radioactive materials are

commonly used as tracers. In general there are two methods of dilution gauging,

sudden-injection methods and constant rate injection method. The two methods

are described as follows.

5.4.1 Sudden Injection method

In this method a quantity of tracer volume V1 and concentration C1 is added to the

river by suddenly emptying a flask of tracer solution that is gulp injection. At the

sampling station downstream the entire tracer cloud is monitored to find the

relation between concentration and time. The quantity of tracer or mass of tracer

M is then equal to C1V1. If t1 is the time before the leading edge of the tracer

cloud arrives at the sampling station and t2 is the time after all the tracer has

passed this station the quantity of tracer is given by

Where: C2 = sustained final (equilibrium) concentration of the chemical in the

well mixed flow (mg/l)

C0 = the base value concentration, already present in the river (mg/l)

Using principle of conservation of mass we may estimate the streamflow Q:

C1V1 = dtCCQ

t

t

)( 02

2

1

(5.5)

dtCC

VCQ

t

t

)( 02

11

2

1

(5.6a)

Page 117: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 108

108

2

11

TC

CVQ (5.6b)

Figure 5-7. Dilution gauging: constant rate injection and gulp injection.

Page 118: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 109

109

5.4.2 Continuous and constant rate injection method

In this method a tracer of known concentration C1 is injected continuously at a

rate q at a sampling station situated downstream of injection point. The mass rate

M at which the tracer enters the test reach is

Assuming that satisfactory mixing of tracer has taken place with the entire flow

across the cross-section with the measured concentration C2 (reaching equilibrium

concentration), we have

201 )( CqQQC qC (5.8)

Solving for Q we get

qC C

C CQ

02

21

(5.9a)

The dilution method is particularly useful for very turbulent flows, which can

provide complete mixing within a relatively short distance. It is also applicable

when the cross section is so rough that alternative methods are unfeasible.

It is to be noted that a highly turbulent and narrow reach is desirable. In this

regard minimum required mixing length can be estimated by

gy

gCCBL

)27.0(13.0 2 (5.9b)

Where: L = mixing length

B = average width of the stream

y = average depth of the stream

C = Chezy’s coefficient of roughness, varying from 15 to 50 for smooth to rough

bed conditions

g = 9.81 m/s2

01 QC qCM (5.7)

Page 119: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 110

110

Example 5.2 25 g/l solution of a chemical tracer was discharged into a stream at 0.01 l/s.

At sufficiently far downstream observation point, the chemical was found to reach an

equilibrium concentration of 5 parts per billion. Estimate the stream discharge. The

background concentration of the tracer chemical in stream water may be taken as nil.

Solution. q = 0.01 l/s = 10–5

m3/s, C1 = 25 gm/l = 20 000 mg/l = 20 000 ppm = 20 part

per billion

Q= qCC

CC

02

21

Q = (20 000/0.005)*10-5

Q = 50 m3/s

Example 5.3 A fluorescent tracer with a concentration of 45 gm/l was injected into a

stream at a constant rate of 8 cm3/s. At a downstream section sufficiently far away from

the point of injection, the concentration was found to be 0.008 parts per million. Estimate

the discharge in the stream. The background concentration of the tracer in the stream is

zero.

Solution. using Eq (5.9a) we get

qC C

C CQ

02

21

0008.

)008.45000(10*8 6

Q

Q = 45 m3/s

5.5 The slope-area method

Occasionally, the high stages and swift currents that prevails during floods

increase the risk of accident and bodily harm. Therefore, it is generally not

possible to measure discharge during the passage of a flood. An estimate of peak

discharge can be obtained indirectly by the use of open channel flow formula.

The following guidelines are used in selecting a suitable reach:

Page 120: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 111

111

i. High-water marks should be readily recognizable.

ii. The reach should be sufficiently long so that fall can be measured

accurately.

iii. The cross-sectional shape and channel dimensions should be relatively

constant.

iv. The reach should be relatively straight, although a contracting reach is

preferred to an expanding reach, and

v. Bridges, channel bends, waterfalls, and other features causing flow non-

uniformity should be avoided. Note that the accuracy of the slope-area

method improves as the reach length increases.

A suitable reach should satisfy one or more of the following criteria:

i. The ratio of reach length to hydraulic depth should be greater than 75.

ii. The fall should be greater than or equal to 0.15 m, and

iii. the fall should be greater than either of the velocity heads computed at the

upstream and downstream cross sections.

The procedure consists of the following steps:

I. Calculate the conveyance K at the upstream and downstream

sections:

3/21uuu RA

nK (5.10)

3/21ddd RA

nK (5.11)

Where: K = conveyance

A = flow x-sectional area (m2)

R = hydraulic radius (m)

n = reach Manning roughness coefficient

u and d denotes upstream and downstream, respectively

II. Calculate the reach conveyance K , equal to the geometric mean of

Page 121: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 112

112

the upstream and downstream conveyances:

2/1)( du KKK (5.12)

III. Calculate the first approximation of the energy slope S:

L

FS (5.13)

Where: F = fall, elevation difference in L;

and L = reach length

IV. Calculate the first approximation to the peak discharge Qi

2/1KSQi (5.14)

V. Calculate the velocity heads:

g

AQh uiu

vu2

)/( 2 (5.15)

g

dAQh uid

vd2

)/( 2 (5.16)

Where: hu and hd are the velocity heads at upstream and downstream sections

respectively,

vu and vd are the velocity heads at upstream and downstream sections

respectively, and

g = gravitational acceleration.

VI. Calculate an updated value of energy slope Si:

Page 122: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 113

113

L

hhkFS vdvu

i

)( (5.17)

Where: k = loss coefficient, for expanding flow, i.e., Ad > Au, k = 0.5, for

contracting flow that is Ad < Au, k = 1.0

VII. Calculate an updated value of peak discharge

2/1

ii KSQ (5.18)

VIII Compare the updated value of peak discharge with previous estimate, and

continue the iteration until you close the difference between the newly estimated

peak discharge and the previously estimated peak discharge.

Example 5.3 Use the slope area method to calculate the peak discharge for the following

data: Reach length = 600 m, fall = 0.6 m. Manning n = 0.037.

Upstream flow area = 1550 m2, upstream wetted perimeter = 450 m, upstream

velocity head coefficient = 1.10. Downstream flow area = 1450 m2 , downstream wetted

perimeter = 400 m, downstream velocity head coefficient = 1.12.

Solution: Basic parameters calculations:

Flow area

Wetted Hydraulic Conveyance (m3/s)

Reach conveyance =

93999.14

(m2) perimeter

(m) radius (m)

upstream section 1550 450 3.44 95,545.32 First App. of S = 0.001 downstream section 1450 400 3.63 92,477.97

Peak discharge computation:

Iter. No.

hvu (m)

h vd (m)

Energy slope Peak discharge

(m/m) (m3/s)

1 0.001 2972.515 2 0.20619 0.2399 0.0009438 2887.815 3 0.19461 0.22642 0.000946 2892.639 4 0.19526 0.22718 0.0009468 2892.368 Hence, the final value converges to Q = 2892.3 m3/s

Page 123: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 114

114

5.6 Orifice formula for bridge opening

The discharge may be calculated from measurements taken on an existing bridge

over the river by using the orifice formula (TRRL, 1992):

)2/1(2

2/1 ]2

)1()[()2(g

VeDDLDgCQ dudo (5.19)

Where:

Q = Discharge at a section just downstream of the bridge (m3/s)

g = Acceleration due to gravity (9.81 m/s2)

L = Linear waterway, i.e. distance between abutments minus width of piers,

measured perpendicular to the flow (m)

Du = Depth of water immediately upstream of the bridge measured from marks

left by the river in flood (m)

Dd = Depth of water immediately downstream of the bridge measured from marks

on the piers, abutments or wing walls (m)

V = Mean velocity of approach (m/s)

Co and e are coefficients to account for the effect of the structure on flow, as listed

in Table 5.2. Definition sketch of the Orifice formula is shown in Figure 5.8.

Table 5-2. Values of Co and e in the orifice formula, L = Width of waterway, and W

=unobstructed width of the stream as defined in Figure 5.9:

L/W Co e

0.50 0.892 1.050

0.55 0.880 1.030

0.60 0.870 1.000

0.65 0.867 0.975

0.70 0.865 0.925

0.75 0.868 0.860

0.80 0.875 0.720

0.85 0.897 0.510

0.90 0.923 0.285

0.95 0.960 0.125

It is to be noted that whenever possible, flow volumes should be calculated by

both the area-velocity and orifice formula methods, and compared.

Page 124: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 115

115

Example 5.4 Calculate the discharge passing through a bridge with a waterway width of

18 m across a stream 30 m wide. In flood the average depth of flow just downstream of

the bridge is 2.0 m and the depth of flow upstream is 2.2 m.

Solution. Discharge at a section just upstream of the bridge, assuming a rectangular

section is A. V = 2.2 x 30 V = 66 V m3/s. Discharge at a section just downstream of the

bridge will be the same and will be given by the orifice formula:

)2/1(2

2/1 ]2

)1()[()2(g

VeDDLDgCQ dudo

L =18, W = 30, L/W = 0.6, thus C0 and e are 0.87 and 1.00 respectively.

)2/1(2

2/1 ]81.9*2

)11()22.2[(2*18)81.9*2(87.0V

Q

Q = 138.6[0.2 + 0.102V2/(2*9.81)]

0.5

Substituting for Q, 66V, we get 66V = 138.6[0.2 + 0.102V2/(2*9.81)]

0.5, V= 1.265

Now Q = 66 V = 66 *1.265 = 83.5 m/s

Page 125: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 116

116

Figure 5-8. Definition sketch of the orifice formula

Page 126: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 117

117

5.7 Stage discharge relationship - rating curve

The rating curve is constructed by plotting successive measurements of the

discharge and gage height on a graph. Figure 5.9 shows an example of rating

curves in linear and logarithmic scale for Zarema river a tributary of Tekeze river

near the foot of Semen Mountains.

Figure 5-9. Rating curves in linear (Top) and logarithmic scale of Zarema

river near Zarema, a tributary of Tekeze river (MWR)..

Rating curve of Zarema river at Zarema

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600

Q (m3/s)

Sta

ge (

m)

Rating curve of Zarema river at Zarema

0.01

0.1

1

10

0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000

Q (m3/s)

Sta

ge (

m)

Page 127: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 118

118

A rating curve must be checked periodically to ensure that the relationship

between Q and H has remained constant. Scouring of the stream bed or deposition

of sediment in the stream can cause the rating curve to change so that the same

recorded gage height produces different Q.

The rating curve is described by a rating equation of the form

where a, b, and H0 are coefficients.

Having paired measured data of (H, Q) the coefficients a and b can be estimated

by taking a trial value of H0 which gives a straight line of the equation:

Or value of H0 adjustment for the low flow, can be estimated with the following

method. Three values of discharge (Q1, Q2, Q3) are selected from known portion

of the curve. One of these should be near the middle of the curve, and the other

value should be near the upper end of the curve. Then the third intermediate value

is estimated by

(5.22)

If H1, H2, and H3 represent the gage heights corresponding to Q1, Q2, and Q3 then

Ho is estimated by

A full rating curve can consist of different rating equation, e.g., one for low flows

and one for high flows, and often for low flows b > 2, for high flows b < 2.

Example5.4 Developed rating curve for the river Zarema near Zarema a tributary of

the Tekeze river having a watershed area of 3259 km2 has the following rating curves:

)H + a(H = Qb

0 (5.20)

)H + (H b + a = Q 0logloglog (5.21)

H2 H + H

H - HH = H

21

2231

03

(5.23)

QQ = Q 312

Page 128: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 119

119

where H is in m and Q in m3/s. Figure 5.10 shows the graphical form of the above

equations.

Extrapolation of ratings. Extrapolation of ratings is necessary when a water

level is recorded above the highest level and flow gauged level. Without

considering the cross-section geometry and controls, large error may result.

Where the cross section is stable, a simple method is to extend the stage-area and

stage velocity curves and, for given stage values, take the product of velocity and

cross-section area to give discharge values beyond the stage values that have been

gauged.

Stage-area and stage velocity curves can easily produced from the data that are

used for establishing the rating curve of the same river. The stage-area curve then

can be extended above the active channel by using standard land-surveying

methods. Extrapolation of the stage-velocity curve requires understanding of the

high stage control. Where there is channel control and where Manning roughness

is not varying with stage, the Manning equation may be used to estimate the

extrapolated velocity. It is to be noted that an upper bound on velocity is normally

imposed by the Froude number V/(gh)0.5

knowing that the Froude number rarely

exceeds unity in alluvial channels.

Shifting in rating curves. The stage-discharge relationship can vary with time, in

response to degradation, aggradation, or a change in channel shape at the control

section. Shifts in rating curves are best detected from regular gaugings and

become evident when several gaugings deviate from the established curve.

Sediment accumulation or vegetation growth at the control will cause deviation

which increases with time, but a flood can flush away sediment and aquatic weed

and cause a sudden reversal of the rating curve shift.

In gravel-bed rivers a flood may break up the armoring of the surface gravel

material, leading to general degradation until a new armoring layer becomes

established, and rating tend to shift between states of quasi-equilibrium. It may

then be possible to shift the rating curve up or down by the change in the mean

0.43m > H upto flow high for (-0.345) + (H69.997 = Q

0.43m H upto flow low for 0.201) + (H4.241 = Q

1.680

3.057

Page 129: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 120

120

bed level, as indicated by plots of stage and bed level versus time. Most of the

rivers in Wollo, such as Mille and Logia exhibit such phenomenon.

In rivers with gentle slopes. discharge for a given stage when the river is rising

may exceed discharge for the same stage when the river is falling (flood

subsiding). In such cases adjustment factors must be applied in calculating

discharge for rising and falling stages.

5.8 Hydrograph

Hydrograph is the graphical representation of the instantaneous rate of discharge

of a stream plotted with respect to time. Annual discharge hydrographs show the

variation of discharge during a year. Annual, monthly and daily discharge

hydrographs for river in the Wabi Shebele basin are shown in Figure 5.10(a) to (c).

Figure 5-10 Daily discharge hydrographs for Wabi Shebele river at Melka Wakana

for the year 1969.

Wabi River at Melkawakana 1969

0.00

20.00

40.00

60.00

80.00

100.00

120.00

140.00

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350

Date beginning from Jan 1

me

an d

aily f

low

(m

3/s

)

Page 130: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 121

121

Figure 5.10 (b) Monthly discharge hydrographs for Wabi Shebele river at Melka

Wakana, Imi and Gode

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

Mo

nth

ly flo

w (M

MC

)

Wabi Shebelle @ Melka Wakana (4 388 sq km, 805 MMC)

Wabi Shebelle @ Imi (91 600 sq km, 2 965 MMC)

Wabi Shebelle @ Gode (127 000 sq km, 3 481 MMC)

Page 131: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 122

122

Figure 5.10 (c) Time series of Wabi Shebele annual river flow at Melka Wakana.

Separation of sources of streamflow on idealized hydrograph is shown in Figure 5.12

Wabi at Melka Wakana

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1100

1200

1300

1400

1500

1965 1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000

Year

An

nu

al fl

ow

in M

illion

Mete

r C

ub

e

Page 132: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 123

123

Figure 5-11. Separation of sources of streamflow on an idealized hydrograph , (b)

sources of streamflow on a hillslope profile during a dry period, (c) and during a

rainfall event, (d) the extent of a stream network during a dry period, (e) and during

a rainfall event.

Page 133: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 124

124

Perennial streams flow continuously in dry months and have continuous

hydrograph, whereas ephemeral streams yield runoff mostly during rainy months

and their hydrograph are discontinued. If ground water flows toward the stream

during periods of heavy rainfall, the stream is called effluent. If flow is from the

stream to the groundwater system, as in the case of dry seasons, the stream is

called influent. Part of the rivers route may have effluent stream and other part

may be influent stream, change with time.

It consists of a rising limb, crest segment, and falling limb, or recession. The

shape of the rising limb is influenced mainly by the character of the storm. The

point of inflection on the falling side of the hydrograph is commonly assumed to

mark the time at which surface inflow to the channel system ceases. Thereafter,

the recession curve represents withdrawal of water from storage within the basin.

The shape of the recession is largely independent of the characteristics of the

storm causing the rise.

Analytical hydrographs. Analytical expression for streamflow hydrographs such

as gamma function are sometimes used in hydrological studies. It is defined as:

)]/()[()()( pgpttttm

pbpb e

t

tQQ Q= Q

(5.24)

Q = flow rate (m3/s)

Qb = baseflow (m3/s)

Qp = peak flow (m3/s)

For values of tg > tp equation 5.24 exhibits positive skewness.

tp = time to peak (hr)

tg = time -to-centroid (hr)

t = time (hr)

m = tp/(tg-tp)

Page 134: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 125

125

Example 5.5 Use Eq. (5.24) to calculate streamflow hydrograph ordinates at hourly

intervals, with the following data: Qb = 10 m3/s, Qp = 85 m

3/s; tp = 2 hr, tg =2.5 h.

Solution Applying Eq. (5.24) we get

Hydrograph

0

20

40

60

80

100

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Time (hr)

Q (

m3/s

)

)]25.2/()2[())25.2/(2()(2

)1085(10 tet

= Q

Values fore example at 1 hr is 44.63 m3/s and at 3.5 hr is 45.02 m3/s. Resulting

hydrograph is plotted above.

Factors affecting the hydrograph shape. The shape of the storm hydrograph is

produced by components from (1) surface runoff, (2) interflow, (3) ground water

or base flow, and (4) channel rainfall. Interflow is that part of rainfall infiltrated

into the soil and move laterally through the upper soil zone until it enters a rills,

or/and small channel or/and stream channel. Interflow may be a large factor in

storms of moderate intensity over watersheds with relatively thin soil covers

overlying rock or hardpan.

The actual shape and timing of the hydrograph is determined largely by the size,

shape, slope, and storage in the watershed and by the intensity and duration of

input rainfall. Geologic features such as the existence of large deep cracks, in the

watershed is also an important factor that determines the hydrograph shape.

5.9 Hydrograph separation

Divisions of a hydrograph into direct runoff or surface runoff and contributed

from the groundwater flow that is the baseflow of the river as a basis for

subsequent analysis is known as hydrograph separation or hydrograph analysis.

Procedures for baseflow separation are usually arbitrary in nature. First it is

Page 135: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 126

126

necessary to identify the point in receding limb of the measured hydrograph

where direct runoff ends. Generally, this ending point is located in such a way that

the receding time up to that point is about 2 to 4 times the time-to-peak.

Key:

Straight line method

Fixed base method

Variable slope method`

Figure 5-12. Baseflow separation techniques (Chow et al. 1988).

A variety of techniques have been suggested for separating base flow and direct

runoff.

These are (a) the straight line method, (b) the fixed base length method, and the

variable slope method. These methods are illustrated in Figure 5.12.

Recession curves often take the form of exponential decay:

ktoeQtQ /)( (5.25)

Hydrograph

0

20

40

60

80

100

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Time (hr)

Q (

m3/s

)

Log(Q)

N

Page 136: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 127

127

Where: Q = baseflow at any time t after the starting time to (m3/s)

Qo = the flow at time to (m3/s)

k = an exponential decay constant or time of storage defined as the time

required for the flow Q to recede to 0.368Qo ( i.e., for t = k, Q = Qoe-1

).

5.9.1 The straight line method

It involves drawing a horizontal line from the point at which surface runoff begins

to the intersection with the recession limb. This is often applicable to ephemeral

streams.

5.9.2 The fixed base method

The surface runoff is assumed to end a fixed time N after the hydrograph peak.

The baseflow before the surface runoff began is projected ahead to the time of the

peak. A straight line is used to connect this projection at the peak to the point on

the recession limb at time N after the peak N can be estimated from

Where: N = time (day)

A = the drainage area in km2

b = 0.8.

This method may be applied for large rivers where their response is in days.

5.9.3 The variable slope method

The base flow curve before the surface runoff began is extrapolated forward to the

time of peak discharge, and the baseflow curve after surface runoff ceases is

extrapolated backward to the time of the point of inflection on the recession limb.

A straight line is used to connect the endpoints of the extrapolated curves.

Ab = N 0.2 (5.25)

Page 137: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 128

128

5.10. Practice problems

5.1 Given the following stream gauging data, calculate the discharge and plote the cross

section of the river at this gauging station.

5.2: The following stage versus discharge data were recorded at the streamflow gauging

station. Establish rating curve(s) and their equation (s) for this gauging station.

H (m) 0.11 0.21 0.31 0.33 0.39 0.45 0.95 1.55 2.15 3.95 5.75

Q m3/s 0.119 0.279 0.544 0.612 0.849 1.141 28.80 91.64 180.69 577.60 1140

5.3 Use the slope area method to calculate the peak discharge for the

following data: Reach length = 800 m, fall = 0.8 m. Manning n = 0.004.

Upstream flow area = 1850 m2, upstream wetted perimeter = 550 m, upstream velocity

head coefficient = 1.10.

Downstream flow area = 1650 m2 , downstream wetted perimeter = 500 m,

downstream velocity head coefficient = 1.12.

5.4. Calculate the discharge passing through a bridge with a waterway width of 20 m

across a stream 35 m wide. In flood the average depth of flow just downstream of the

bridge is 2.5 m and the depth of flow upstream is 2.3 m.

Vertical No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Distance to reference

point (m)

12.0 22.0 32.0 40.0 48.0 56.0 64.0 74.0 84.0 94.0 104.0

Sounding depth (m) 0.0 1.5 2.8 3.2 4.5 4.8 3.9 3.2 2.2 2.1 1.5

Velocity at 0.2 m (m/s) 0.0 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.2 2.4 2.7 2.3 1.9 1.7 1.8

Velocity at 0.8 m (m/s) 0.0 1.4 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.0 1.7 1.3 1.4

Page 138: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 129

129

6. WATERSHED PROPERTIES

Surface runoff in watersheds occurs as a progression of the following forms: (1)

over-land flow, (2) rill flow, (3) gully flow, (4) streamflow, and (5) river flow.

Overland flow is runoff that occurs during or immediately after a storm, in the

form of sheet flow over the land surface. Rill flow is runoff that occurs in the

form of small rivulets, primarily by concentration of overland flow. Gully flow is

runoff that has concentrated into depths large enough so that it has the erosive

power to carve its own deep and narrow channel (gully). Streamflow is

concentrated runoff originating in overland flow, rill flow, or gully flow and is

characterized by well-defined channels or streams of sizable depth. Streams carry

their flow into larger streams, which flow into rivers to constitute river flow. It is

to be noted that interflow will contribute to the surface runoff manifested as rill

flow, gully flow, and streamflow.

A watershed can range from as little as 1 ha to hundreds of thousands of square

kilometers. Small watersheds are those where runoff is controlled by overland

flow processes. Large watersheds (river basins) are those where runoff is

controlled by storage processes in the river channels.

The hydrologic characteristics of a watershed are described in terms of the

following properties: (1) area, (2) shape, (3) relief, (4) linear measures, and (5)

drainage patterns.

6.1 Watershed area

Area, or drainage area, or watershed area, or watershed area, is perhaps the most

important watershed property. It determines the potential runoff volume, provided

the storm covers the whole area. The watershed divide is the loci of points

delimiting two adjacent watersheds, i.e., the curve formed from the high points

separating watersheds draining into different outlets. Due to the effect of

subsurface flow (interflow and groundwater flow), the hydrologic watershed

divide may not strictly coincide with the topographic watershed divide. The

hydrologic divide, however, is less tractable than the topographic divide;

therefore, the latter is preferred for practical use.

The topographic divide is delineated on topographic map of suitable scale say 1:

10,000. Overland flow originates at high points and moves towards low points in

Page 139: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 130

130

)1.6(n

p cAQ

2L

AK f

5.0

282.0

A

PKc

a direction perpendicular to the contour lines. The area enclosed within the

topographic divide is the watershed area. A planimeter is often used to measure

the watershed area.

In general, the larger the watershed area, the greater the amount of surface runoff

and, consequently, the greater the surface flows. For example, peak flow to a

watershed area may be related by the basic formula

Where: Qp = peak flow

A = watershed area

c and n = parameters to be determined by regional regression

analysis.

6.2 Watershed shape

Watershed shape is the outline described by the horizontal projection of a

watershed. Watersheds vary widely in shape. A quantitative description is

provided by the following formula

(6.2)

Where: Kf = form ratio

A = watershed area

L = watershed length measured along the longest

watercourse.

An alternative description is based on watershed perimeter rather than area. For

this purpose, an equivalent circle is defined as a circle of area equal to that of the

watershed. The compactness ratio is the ratio of the watershed perimeter to that of

the equivalent circle. This leads to

(6.3)

Where; Kc = compactness ratio, P = watershed perimeter

A = watershed area

Page 140: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 131

131

6.3 Watershed relief

Relief is the elevation difference between two reference points. Maximum

watershed relief is the elevation difference between the highest point in the

watershed divide and the watershed outlet. The principal watercourse (or main

stream) is the central and the largest watercourse of the watershed and the one

conveying the runoff to the outlet. Relief ratio is the ratio of maximum watershed

relief to the watershed’s longest horizontal straight distance measured in a

direction parallel to that of the principal watercourse. The relief ratio is a measure

of the intensity of the erosion processes active in the watershed (Ponce, 1989).

The overall relief of a watershed is described by hypsometric analysis.

Hypsometric curve is a dimensionless curve showing the variation with elevation

of the watershed sub-area above that elevation. This is illustrated by in Example

6.1. The median elevation of the watershed is obtained from the percent height

corresponding to 50 percent area. The hypsometric curve is used to quantitatively

evaluate a hydrological variable such as precipitation or vegetation cover when

showing a marked tendency to vary with altitude.

Other measure of watershed relief are based on stream and channel

characteristics. The longitudinal profile of a watershed is a plot of elevation

versus horizontal distance. At a given point in the profile, the elevation is usually

a mean value of the channel bed. Between any two points, the channel gradient

(or channel slope) is the ratio of elevation difference to horizontal distance

separating them. Channel gradient vary widely, from as high as 0.10 for very

steep mountain streams to as low as 0.0005 for streams in the plain land /lowland.

The channel gradient can be obtained in different ways. The first method uses the

max. and min. elevations, the second method is defined as the constant slope that

makes the shaded area above the longitudinal profile equal to the shaded area

below the longitudinal profile. Typical watershed relief types in the upper ,middle and

lower watersheds of the Wabi Shebele basin is given in Figure 1.,

Page 141: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 132

132

Upper watershed, Enemora river Near Ticho February 2002, (elevation > 3000 meter

above sea level)

Middle course area – Galeti near Hirna, February 2002, (1800 m above sea level)

Page 142: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 133

133

Lower watershed- Wabi Shebele at Gode Februray 2002, (elevation about 400 meter

above sea level)

Page 143: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 134

134

Example 6.1: The following data have been obtained by planimetering 135 km2

watershed.

Plot the hypsometric curve for the above watershed

Solution:

ELEVATION

(M)

SUBAREA ABOVE INDICATED

ELEVATION (KM2)

1010 135

1020 85

1030 65

1040 30

1050 12

1060 4

1070 0

Elevation, E, (m) Catch. Area, A, (km2) A/135 *100 Y = (E -Emin)/(Emax-Emin) *100

1010 135 100 0

1020 85 63 20

1030 65 48 40

1040 30 22 60

1050 12 9 80

1060 4 3 100

Y

Ai / Ac

0

20

40

60

80

100

0 20 40 60 80 100

Page 144: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 135

135

6.4 Stream networks

The watershed length (or hydraulic length) is the length measured along the

principal watercourse (Fig. 6.1a). The principal watercourse is the central and

largest watercourse of the watershed and the one conveying runoff to the outlet.

The length to the watershed centroid is the length measured along the principal

watercourse from the watershed outlet to a point located closest to the watershed

centroid (Fig. 6.1a).

Figure 6.2 Typical recognizable drainage patter from aerial photograph.

Figure 6.1. Top: Linear measures of a watershed, (Bottom) Concept of stream order.

.

Page 145: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 136

136

Figure 6.2 Typical recognizable drainage patter from aerial photograph

Page 146: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 137

137

Page 147: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 138

138

(6.1)

(6

(6.2)

(6.3)

Table 6.1. Indicative values for bifurcation ratio, length ratio and drainage area order

Page 148: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 139

139

(6.4)

(6.5)

(6.6)

(6.7)

Page 149: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 140

140

(6.8)

(6.9)

Page 150: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 141

141

(6.10)

(6.11)

(6.12)

(6.13)

Page 151: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 142

142

(6.14)

(6.15)

(6.16)

(6.17)

Page 152: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 143

143

(6.18)

(6.20)

Page 153: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 144

144

(6.21)

Page 154: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 145

145

Page 155: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 146

146

(6.22)

(6.23)

Page 156: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 147

147

Page 157: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 148

148

6.5 Practice Problems.

6.1 Based on the following topographic map, delineate the watershed and

calculate form ratio and compactness ratio.

Page 158: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Watershed properties

_______________________________________________________________________________

Engineering Hydrology 149

149

Example watershed in Wabi Shebele basin - catchment area divide line of Jilbo

river and Birhamo irrigation area (done based on 1: 10,000 Topo-map provided by

Ethiopian Mapping Authority.

Page 159: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

150

7 Hydrology of small watersheds

Watershed area plays an important role in setting methodology for analyzing

surface runoff, groundwater flow, evaporation and other hydrological variables. In

practice watershed are divided into small, medium and large watersheds

depending on their watershed area. This chapter discusses salient hydrologic

features of small watersheds.

The following characteristics describe a small watershed:

(1) rainfall can be assumed to be uniformly distributed in time and space,

(2) storm duration usually exceeds concentration time,

(3) runoff is primarily by overland flow, and

(4) channel storage processes are negligible.

The upper limit of small watershed is difficult to define because of the natural

variability such as watershed slope and vegetation cover varies from watershed to

watershed and within watershed. In practice, either the concentration time of less

than 1 hr or watershed area less than 2.5 - 10 km2

has been used to define the

upper limit of a small watershed. The rational method is the most widely used

method of estimation runoff from small watersheds.

7.1 The rational method

The rational method is widely used around the world for flood estimation on

small rural watersheds and is the most widely used method for urban drainage

design. It is generally considered to be an approximate deterministic model

representing the flood peak that results from a given rainfall, with the runoff

coefficient being the ratio of the peak rate of runoff to the rainfall intensity over a

given watershed area.

The rational method takes into account the following hydrological

characteristics or processes: (1) rainfall intensity, (2) rainfall duration, (3) rainfall

frequency, (4) watershed area, (5) hydrologic abstraction, and (6) runoff

concentration.

Page 160: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

151

The rational method does not take into account directly the following

characteristics or processes:

(1) spatial or temporal variations in either total or effective rainfall, and

(2) concentration time much greater than rainfall duration.

The rational method formula is

(7.1)

Where:

Qp = the peak discharge for the required return period (m3/s)

C = the runoff coefficient (Table 7.1)

I = the rainfall intensity for a required return period of duration equal to

critical storm duration (mm/hr)

A = the drainage watershed area (km2)

The average rainfall intensity I has a duration equal to the critical storm duration,

normally taken as the time of concentration tc. For design, I is estimated from the

rainfall intensity-duration-frequency data for the location, with its frequency the

same as that selected for the design flood. Time of concentration is an idealized

concept and is defined as the time taken for a drop of water falling on the most

remote point of a drainage basin to reach the outlet, where remoteness relates to

time of travel rather than distance. In other words, it is the time after

commencement of rainfall excess when all portion of the drainage basin are

contributing simultaneously to flow at the outlet.

7.1.1 Determination of tc

For urban areas, values of tc are normally calculated as length divided by velocity

determined by hydraulic formulas. For rural drainage basins, tc is generally

estimated by means of an empirical formula such as Kirpich’s equation:

(7.2)

Where:

L = the length of channel from divide to outlet (km)

S = the average channel slope (m/m)

tc.= the time of concentration (min)

CIAQp 278.0

385.077.0976.3 SLtc

Page 161: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

152

7.1.2 Estimation of runoff coefficient C

Estimating the value of the runoff coefficient is the greatest difficulty and the

major source of uncertainty in application of the rational method. The coefficient

must account for all the factors affecting the relation of peak flow to average

rainfall intensity other than area and response time. A better estimate would be

obtained from measurements of runoff volume at the outlet of the case watershed

and rainfall volume over the watershed. Indicative runoff coefficients for urban

areas and for rural areas are given in Table 7.1(a) and 7.1(b).

Table 7.1(a) Average runoff coefficients for urban areas: 5-year and 10-year design

frequency (Maidment, 1993).

Description of area Runoff coefficient

Business

Downtown areas

Neighborhood areas

0.70 to 0.95

0.50 to 0.70

Residential

Single-family areas

Multiple units, detached

Multiple units, attached

0.30 to 0.50

0.40 to 0.60

0.60 to 0.75

Residential (suburban) 0.25 to 0.40

Apartment –dwelling area 0.50 to 0.70

Industrial

Light areas

Heavy areas

0.50 to 0.80

0.60 to 0.90

Parks, cemeteries 0.10 to 0.25

Playgrounds 0.10 to 0.25

Railroad yard areas 0.20 to 0.40

Unimproved areas 0.10 to 0.30

Characteristics of surface Runoff coefficient

Streets: Asphaltic

Concrete

Brick

0.70 to 0.95

0.80 to 0.95

0.70 to 0.85

Drives and walks 0.70 to 0.85

Roofs 0.75 to 0.95

Lawns, sandy soil

Flat (2 %)

Average (2 to 7 %)

Steep (7%)

0.05 to 0.10

0.10 to 0.15

0.15 to 0.20

Lawns, heavy soil: Flat (2 %)

Average (2 to 7 %)

Steep (7%)

0.13 to 0.17

0.18 to 0.22

0.25 to 0.35

Page 162: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

153

Table 7.1(b) Average runoff coefficients for rural areas (Schwab, et al., 1993)

Topography and

Vegetation

Soil Texture

Open Sandy Loam Clay and Silt Loam Tight Clay

Woodland

Flat

Rolling

Hilly

0.10

0.25

0.30

0.30

0.35

0.50

0.40

0.50

0.60

Pasture

Flat

Rolling

Hilly

0.10

0.16

0.22

0.30

0.36

0.42

0.40

0.55

0.60

Cultivated land

Flat

Rolling

Hilly

0.30

0.40

0.52

0.50

0.60

0.72

0.60

0.70

0.82

Note: Flat (0 – 5 % slope); rolling (5 –10 % slope), hilly (10 – 30 % slope)

7.1.3 Composite watershed

A composite watershed is one that drains two or more adjacent watersheds of

widely differing characteristics in time of concentration and runoff coefficients.

To apply the rational method to composite watershed, as in Figure 7.1, several

rainfall duration are chosen, ranging from the smallest time of concentration to

the largest adjacent watershed time of concentration.

Page 163: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

154

A

Figure 7.1 Composite watersheds having different time of concentration. The

objective is to find the peak flow at S.

The calculation proceeds by trial and error, with each trial associated with

each rainfall duration. To calculate the partial contribution from the watershed,

which has the largest time of concentration, an assumption must be made

regarding the rate at which the flow is concentrated at the watershed outlet. The

rainfall duration that gives the highest combined peak flow (A plus B) is taken as

the design rainfall duration.

Example 7.1 A watershed has a runoff coefficient of 0.20, area 150 ha with the general

slope of 0.001 and maximum length of travel of overland flow of 1.25 km. Information

on the storm of 50 years return period is given as follows:

Duration (min) 15 30 45 60 80

Rainfall (mm) 40 60 75 100 120

Estimate the peak flow to be drained by a culvert for a 50-year storm.

Solution. First the time of concentration tc is calculated using Eq. (7.2)

tc = 67.5 min

Maximum depth of rainfall for 67.5 min duration is obtained by interpolation from the

given rainfall duration and return period.

= 100 + [(120-100)/20]*7.5

385.077.0976.3 SLtc

385.077.0 )001.0()25.1(976.3 ct

Page 164: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

155

= 107.5 mm

Intensity of rainfall is then calculated (mm/hr):

= (107.5 / 67.5) * 60 = 95.5 mm/hr

Finally the peak flow to be drained by a culvert for a 50-year storm is calculated by

Q = 0.278 CIA

Q = 0.278* 0.20*95.5*1.50

Q = 7.96 m3/s

Example 7.2 Calculate the peak discharge by the rational method for a 1.5 km2

composite watershed shown in Figure 7.1 with the following characteristics:

Subarea A

Heavy industrial

Subarea B

Residential

(suburban)

Area km2 0.6 0.9

Runoff coefficient 0.6 0.3

Time of concentration (min) 40 100

Assume a return period T = 10 y and the following IDF function:

Where:

I = rainfall intensity (mm/hr)

T = return period in years

tr = rainfall duration in minutes

Solution:

To compute the contribution of sub-area B, assume that the flow concentrates linearly at

the outlet, i.e., each equal increment of time causes an equal increment of area

contributing to the flow at the outlet.

First choose rainfall duration between 40 and 100 minutes at 10 min. intervals. For each

rainfall duration, rainfall intensity is calculated using

67.0

22.0

)20(

1100

rt

TI

67.0

22.0

)20(

1100

rt

TI

Page 165: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

156

The Assumption of linear concentration for sub-area B leads to the following:

Rainfal duration Rainfall intensity Contributing area of B Peak flow at C

(min) (mm/hr) (km2) (m3/s)

40 117.50 0.12 12.94

50 105.97 0.24 12.73

60 96.90 0.36 12.61

70 89.55 0.48 12.55

80 83.44 0.60 12.53

90 78.28 0.72 12.54

100 73.85 0.84 12.56

For the above calculation it is clear that the peak flood is 12.94 m3/s corresponding to 40

min. of time of concentration.

7.2 Application of the rational method to storm-sewer and

culvert size design

7.2.1 Design of storm sewer

The design of storm sewer systems is a direct application of the principles from

both hydrology and hydraulics. IDF curves are used to specify rainfall intensities.

Watershed characteristics are used to estimate the volume and flow rate of the

runoff from the rainfall. Flow equation are used to calculate pipe and channel size

necessary to convey the calculated rate of flow.

Determination of storm sewer flow rates. A storm sewer is typically designed for

a specific return period of storm, usually 10 or 25 years. The duration D used in

the determination of the rainfall intensity is equal to the time of concentration of

the contributing watersheds. Storm sewer design regulations usually specify a

minimum time of concentration, and if the watershed time of concentration is less

than the specified minimum, then use the specified minimum time of

concentration. In cases where a storm sewer inlet has upstream piping, the

maximum of the watershed time of concentration or the accumulated upstream

travel time is used.

Page 166: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

157

Hydraulic grade line calculation. Once flow rates have been calculated throughout

the system, the hydraulic grades are then determined. The flow in the sewer is

assumed to be open channel flow. Within storm sewer pipe systems the slope of

the hydraulic grade line (HGL) can be calculated using Manning’s Equation:

(7.3)

Where:

V = velocity in the sewer (m/s)

R = hydraulic radius of the sewer (m)

S = Slope of the hydraulic grade line taken parallel to the sewer slope

(m/m)

n = Manning roughness, commonly used design values are:

n = 0.013 for verified sewer pipe, and

n = 0.015 for concrete pipe

With a known slope of the HGL, it is possible to calculate upstream hydraulic

grade (HG) with a known downstream grade.

HG upstream = HG downstream + SL (7.4)

The term SL is also the headloss in the pipe section. Headloss at junctions, inlets,

or manholes can be calculated using the equation:

(7.5)

Where:

HL = headloss (m)

K = headloss coefficient dependent on geometry

V = maximum velocity influent to junction (m/s)

g = gravitational constant

c

c

c

tupstreamdAccumulate

trequiredMinimum

tWatershed

D max

2/13/21SR

nV

g

VKH L

2

2

Page 167: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

158

By summing headlosses in upstream direction the hydraulic grade at any

point within the system can be calculated.

Example 7.3 A storm sewer system must be designed to convey storm water from three

watersheds to a pond with a free discharge tailewater condition. The following watershed

information was collected:

Watershed 1 Watershed 2 Watershed 3

Area (ha) 0.5059 0.2711 0.3804

C 0.78 0.75 0.85

tc (min) 10.0 10.0 10.

Ground elevation (m) 29.61 29.22 28.35

The inlet for watershed 1 is 90 m from the inlet for watershed 3. The inlet for watershed 2

is 75 m from the inlet for watershed 3. The inlet for watershed 3 is 13.5 m upstream of

the outlet pond. The IDF curve for the region for 25-yr return period is estimated by

Where:

I = rainfall intensity (mm/hr)

D = rainfall duration (min)

The following constraints must be met in the design of the system:

Minimum Maximum

Velocity (m/s) 0.75 4.5

Cover (m) 0.9 3.0

Assume that the pipe roughness (Manning’s n) is 0.02 for all pipes. The ground elevation

at the outlet is 27.93 m.

Solution:

First the system is schematized:

Watershed 3

Watershed 1

Watershed 2

8.0)12(

1600

DI

outlet 75 m

90 m

135 m

Page 168: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

159

Catch 1 catch. 2 catch. 3

area (ha) 0.51 0.27 0.38

C 0.78 0.75 0.85

tc (min) 10.00 10.00 11.08

I (mm/hr) 134.95 134.95 129.88

Q (m3/s) 0.15 0.08 0.12

Capacity full

for 450 mm pipe (m3/s) 0.2192724 Q actual/Qfull 0.674613

Using the calculated flow rates and knowing the ground elevations at inlet 1, inlet 2, and

inlet 3 we can try pipe sizes and invert elevations for the piping from inlet 1 to inlet 3,

from inlet 2 to inlet 3. This pipe size should minimize cover while still meeting the cover

constraints. The slope of the pipe can match the slope of the ground, therefore the slope

can be calculated

An 18 in (450 mm) pipe from inlet 1 to inlet 3 has a normal depth of 265 mm and flow

velocity of 1.5 m/s at this depth. A 15 in (375 mm) pipe from inlet 2 to inlet 3 has a

normal depth of 207 mm and flow velocity of 1.15 m/s at this depth. The pipe invert

should be placed so that the cover constraint is met.

Upstream invert pipe 1 = ground elevation – ground cover – pipe diameter

= 29.61 – 0.90 – 0.45 = 28.260 m

Downstream invert pipe 1 = 28.35 – 0.90 – 0.45 = 27.000 m

Upstream invert pipe 2 = 29.22 – 0.90 – 0..375 = 27.945 m

Downstream invert pipe 2 = 28.35 – 0.90 – 0.375 =27.075 m

Time of flow in each pipe must be calculated – knowing the pipe length and the velocity

we can determine this time.

0116.075

35.2822.29

014.090

35.2861.29

32

31

S

S

Page 169: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

160

Time pipe 1 = L/ velocity of flow = 90 m / (1.467 m/s) = 61.1 sec = 1.02 min.

Time pipe 2 = L/ velocity of flow = 75 m / (1.158 m/s) = 64.76 sec = 1.08 min.

The time of concentration to use for inlet 3 is therefore 10 min + 1.08 min. or 11.08 min.

This duration gives an intensity of 130 mm/hr and a flow rate of 0.1556 m3/s. The total

discharge through pipe 3 will be then the sum of the inlet discharges and the influent

discharge.

Q pipe 3 = 0.12 + 0.15 +0.08 = 0.35 m3/s

If the slope for pipe 3 follows the ground slope then S pipe 3 = 0.0031. A 30 in (750 mm) at

this slope and discharge will have a normal depth of 516 mm and a velocity of 1.01 m/s.

The pipe invert should be placed so that the cover constraint is met.

Upstream invert pipe 3 = ground elevation – ground cover – pipe diameter

= 28.35 – 0.90 – 0.75 = 26.70 m

Downstream invert pipe 3 = 27.93 – 0.90 – 0.75 = 26.28 m

Assuming there is no backwater condition at the outlet and that flow will exist at the

normal depth with backwater or drawdown, the hydraulic grade in the system can be

calculated. Junction losses at inlet 3 can be estimated using the junction headloss

equation. The maximum influent velocity is 1.467 m/s. Using an assumed K = 0.5, the

head loss is

HG outlet = invert elevation + normal depth = 26.28 + 0.516 = 26.841 m

HG outflow inlet 3 = invert elevation + normal depth = 26.70 + 0.516 = 27.2161 m

HG inflow inlet 3 = 27.2161 + 0.0548 = 27.2708 m

HG outflow pipe 2 = max. (27.2708, 27.075 + 0.265) = 27.34 m

HG outflow pipe 1 = max. (27.2708, 27.000 + 0.207) = 27.27 m

mmg

VKHL 8.54

81.9*2

467.15.0

2

22

Page 170: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

161

The outflow of pipe 1 has a mild backwater condition (27.2708 –27.207 = 0.0638 m).

Since the backwater is not severe we will assume that flow reaches normal depth before

reaching the upstream invert.

HG inflow pipe 1 = 28.260 + 0.207 = 28.467 m

HG inflow pipe 2 = 27.945 + 0.265 = 28.210 m

This pipe system will meet then all the required constraints.

Example 7.4 A typical plan for design of a small storm-sewer project is shown in

Figure 7.2. Table 7.2 shows a summary of the computations illustrating the application of

the rational method to determine design flows based on the following data:

i. Runoff coefficients

(a) Residential area: C = 0.3

(b) Business area: C = 0.6

ii. Areal weighting of runoff coefficients where required

iii. Selected design frequency = 5 years

iv. Intensity-Duration- Frequency curve

v. Inlet time = 20 min.

vi. Manning n in sewer = 0.013

vii. Free outfall to river at elevation = 80 m

viii. A drop of 3 cm across each manhole where no change in pipe size occurs (to

account in head losses). When a change in pipe size occurs, set the elevation of

0.8 of pipe depths equal, and provide corresponding fall in manhole invert.

Page 171: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

162

Figure 7.2.

Page 172: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

163

Excel File:

Page 173: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

164

7.3 Practice problems:

7.1. Using the plan given in Example 7.4 for design of a small storm-sewer project and

the following data:

(1) Runoff coefficients

(a) Residential area: C = 0.4

(b) Business area: C = 0.7

(c) Areal weighting of runoff coefficients where required

(2) Selected design frequency = 5 years

(3) Intensity-Duration- Frequency equation:

Where:

I = rainfall intensity (mm/hr)

D = rainfall duration (min)

(4) Inlet time = 25 min.

(5) Manning n in sewer = 0.013

(6) Free outfall to river at elevation = 80 m

(7) A drop of 3 cm across each manhole where no changes in pipe size occurs (to account

in head losses). When a change in pipe size occurs, set the elevation of 0.8 of pipe depths

equal, and provide corresponding fall in manhole invert.

Design the storm water sewer system.

7.2. Determine a 10-year peak flow at a storm water inlet from a 40 ha area in rolling

terrain. An inlet time of 20 min may be assumed. IDF curve of Problem 7.1 may be used.

Land use is as follows.

Land use Area (ha) Runoff coefficient

Single-family residential 30 0.40

Commercial 3 0.60

Park 7 0.15

75.0)10(

1500

DI

Page 174: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Small Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

165

Page 175: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

166

8. Hydrology of midsize watersheds

The following characteristics describe a midsize watershed: (1) rainfall intensity

varies within the storm duration, (2) rainfall can be assumed to be uniformly

distributed in space, (3) runoff is by overland flow and stream channel flow, and

(4) channel storage processes is negligible.

For midsize watersheds, runoff response is primarily a function of the

characteristics of the storm hyetograph, with concentration time playing a

secondary role. Watershed values ranging from few 100 km2 to 5000 km

2 may be

considered as midsize watersheds. The lower limit however could go up to 50 ha

depending on the design guideline followed for a specific purpose.

Commonly used hydrological techniques for estimating flood hydrograph from

midsize watershed are the Soil Conservation Service (SCS) and the unit

hydrograph methods.

8.1 The SCS method

The SCS method is widely used for estimating floods on small to medium-sized

ungaged drainage basins around the world (Graphical presentation is given in

Figure 8.1) . The method was developed based on 24-hr rainfall runoff data in

USA. In its derivation it is assumed that no runoff occurs until rainfall equals an

initial abstraction (that is losses before runoff begins) Ia, and also satisfies

cumulative infiltration F (the actual retention before runoff begins) or water

retained in the drainage basin, excluding Ia. The potential retention (the potential

retention before runoff begins ) S is the value that (F + Ia) would reach in a very

long storm.

If Pe is the effective storm rainfall equal to (P - Ia), and rd = depth of runoff

the basic assumption in the method is

(8.1) e

d

P

r

S

F

Page 176: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

167

Figure 8-1: SCS Relation between Direct Runoff, Curve Number and Precipitation

Eq. (8.1) states that the ratio of actual retention to potential retention is equal to

the ratio of actual runoff to potential runoff. The empirical relation Ia = 0.2S was

Page 177: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

168

adopted as the best approximation from observed data, and so Pe = (P - 0.2S). For

convenience and to standardize application of SCS method, the potential retention

is expressed in the form of a dimensionless runoff curve number CN.

8.1.1 SCS Peak discharge and flood hydrograph determination

The peak discharge in the SCS method is derived from the triangular

approximation to the hydrograph shown in Figure 8.2 resulting from rainfall

excess of duration D.

Rainfall excess

La

Peak flow

Direct runoff

qp

D 1.67 Tp

Tp

2.67 Tp

The lag La of the peak flow, time from the centroid of rainfall excess to the peak

of the hydrograph, is assumed to be 0.6tc. Then the time of rise Tp to the peak of

the hydrograph is

cp tD= T 6.05.0 (8.2)

The base length of the hydrograph is assumed to be 2.67Tp. Then from a

triangular hydrograph assumption (excess rainfall depth = runoff depth) the peak

discharge can then be estimated from

Figure 8.2: SCS triangular hydrograph

Page 178: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

169

c

dp

tD

Ar = q

6.05.0

208.0

(8.3)

Where:

qp = peak discharge (m3/s)

rd = the excess rainfall depth (mm) determined from Eq. (8.4)

A = watershed area (km2)

tc = time of concentration (hr)

D = duration of excess rainfall (hr)

The depth of runoff resulting from a required return period rainfall depth of

duration corresponding to the time of concentration tc is estimated by

0.8S + P

)0.2S - (P = r

2

d (8.4)

where:

rd = depth of runoff equal to depth of excess rainfall (mm)

S = the potential retention (mm)

P = design rainfall amount of duration tc corresponding to T years return period (mm)

and S (mm) is estimated using

)1 - CN

100254( =S (8.5)

To estimate the time of concentration tc the Kirpich formula (Chapter 7) may be

used, that is

GL 3.97 = t-0.3850.77

c

where:

L = the length of the river from the divide to the outlet (km)

G = the average river slope (m/m)

tc = time of concentration (min)

The explicit consideration of the various factors that are thought to affect flood

runoff makes the method attractive. Designers however may have uncertainties in

choosing the CN and in determining the method for tc. It is found that assumed

antecedent moisture condition had major effect and that results were better for

bare soil or sparse vegetation than for dense vegetation. Therefore care is required

in its application, and there is a need for checking of the method against observed

Page 179: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

170

flood data for the region of interest or with other methods. Table 8.1 & Table 8.2

provide experimental values of CN for different land use or crop, treatment

practice, hydrological soil group and antecedent moisture conditions. The use of

SCS method is illustrated by Example 8.1.

Example 8.1 A certain watershed experienced 12.7 cm heavy storm in a single day. The

watershed is covered by pasture with medium grazing, and 32 % of B soils and 68 % of C

soils. This event has been preceded by 6.35 cm of rainfall in the last 5 days. Following

the SCS methodology, determine the direct runoff for the 12.7 cm rainfall event.

Solution. From Table 8.1, for pasture range fair hydrologic condition for B soil the CN =

68 and for C soil the CN = 79. The weighted curve number for the AMC II is

CN = 0.32*68 + 0.68*79 = 76

AMC III is taken because for the last 5 days there was substantial rainfall. The CN for

the AMC III is

II

IIIII

CN

CN = CN

0057.043.0

8876*0057.043.0

76

= CN III

Then S is calculated using

)1 - CN

100254( = S

= 254(100/88 - 1) = 35 mm

The direct runoff depth is

0.8S + P

)0.2S - (P = r

2

d

= mm0.8 +

)0.2 - (

2

9335*127

35*127

The direct runoff produced by the 127 mm heavy storm is thus 93 mm. It is 73 % of the

total rainfall. If this rainfall would have occurred on the AMC I - dry condition then

5876*013.03.2

76

= CN I

Page 180: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

171

)1 - CN

100254( = S

= 254(100/58 - 1) = 183 mm

0.8S + P

)0.2S - (P = r

2

d = mm0.8 +

)0.2 - (

2

29183*127

183*127

which is 29/127=23 % of the total rainfall. The AMC III and AMC I gave results of

dramatic difference.

Table 8.1: Runoff curve numbers for hydrological soil-cover complexes for antecedent

rainfall condition II and Ia = 0.2S. For Conditions I and III see Table 8.2 (Maidment, 1993)

Land use or

Crop

Treatment or

practice

Hydrologic

condition

Hydrologic soil group

A B C D

Fallow Straight row - 77 86 91 94

Row crops Straight row Poor 72 81 88 91

Straight row Good 67 78 85 89

Contoured Poor 70 97 84 88

Contoured Good 65 75 82 86

Terraced Poor 66 74 80 82

Terraced Good 62 71 78 81

Small grain Straight row Poor 65 76 84 88

Straight row Good 63 75 83 87

Contoured Poor 63 74 82 85

Contoured Good 61 73 81 84

Terraced Poor 61 72 79 82

Terraced Good 59 70 78 81

Close-seeded

legumes or rotation

meadow

Straight row Poor 66 77 85 89

Straight row Good 58 72 81 85

Contoured Poor 64 75 83 85

Contoured Good 55 69 78 83

Terraced Poor 63 73 80 83

Terraced Good 51 67 76 80

Pasture range Poor 68 79 86 89

Fair 49 68 79 84

Good 39 61 74 80

Contoured Poor 47 67 81 88

Contoured Fair 25 59 75 83

Contoured Good 6 35 70 79

Meadow (permanent) Good 30 58 71 78

Wood (farm woodlots) Poor 45 66 77 83

Fair 36 60 73 79

Good 25 55 70 77

Farmsteads --- 59 74 82 86

74 84 90 92

Page 181: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

172

Soil Group Description Final infiltration

rate (mm/hr)

A Lowest runoff potential. Include deep sands with

very little silt and clay, also deep loess and

aggregated silt.

8-12

B Moderately low runoff potential: mostly sandy soils

less deep than A and loess less deep and aggregated

than A, but the group as a whole has above-average

infiltration after thorough wetting.

4-8

C Moderately high runoff potential: comprises shallow

soils and soils containing considerable clay and

colloids, though less than those of group D. Clay

loams, Shallow sandy loam, The group has below

average infiltration after pre-saturation

1-4

D Highest runoff potential. Includes mostly clays of

high swelling soil, heavy plastic clays, but the group

also includes some shallow soils with nearly

impermeable sub-horizons near the surface

0-1

Table 8.2 Antecedent rainfall conditions and curve numbers (for Ia = 0.2S)

Curve number for

Condition II

Factor to convert curve number for condition II to

Condition I Condition III

10 0.40 2.22

20 0.45 1.85

30 0.50 1.67

40 0.55 1.50

50 0.62 1.40

60 0.67 1.30

70 0.73 1.21

80 0.79 1.14

90 0.87 1.07

100 1.00 1.00

5-day antecedent rainfall (mm)

Condition

General description

Dormant Growing

Season Season

I Optimum soil condition from about

lower plastic limit to wilting point

< 13 < 36

II Average value for annual floods 13 – 28 36 – 53

III Heavy rainfall or light rainfall and

low temperatures within 5 days prior

to the given storm

> 28 > 53

Page 182: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

173

Note that the dry and wet antecedent moisture conditions, AMC I and AMC III may be

calculated from

II

IIIII

II

III

CN

CN = CN

CN

CN = CN

0057.043.0,

013.03.2

(8.7)

or estimated using the coefficients given in Table 8.1

Example 8.2 Determine (a) the design peak runoff rate, for a 50-year return period

storm from a 120 km2 watershed having IDF curve (I in mm/hr, T in years and tc in

minutes) given by

78.0

18.0

)20(

500

ct

T = I

and with the following characteristics:

Subarea

(km2)

Topography

Slope (%)

Soil group Land use, treatment, and

hydrological condition

75 10-35 C Row crop, contoured, good

45 20-45 B Woodland, good

The maximum length of flow is 15 km and the difference in elevation along this path is

450 m.

Solution.

First we estimate the time of concentration:

SL 3.97 = t-0.3850.77

c

)15000/450(15-0.3850.77

c 3.97 = t

= 123 min.

for the return period of 50 years and tc = 123 min, the design intensity of rainfall is

estimated by

Page 183: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

174

78.0

18.0

)20(

500

ct

T = I

78.0

18.0

)20123(

50*500

= I

= 22 mm/hr

The average curve number CN for the watershed is

2120

451

120

75CNCN = CN

From Table 8.1 and 8.2 CNI for the soil group C and Row crop, contoured, good

condition is 82, CNII for the soil group B and wood land and good condition is 55, and

CN = 72. Estimating s with

)1 - CN

100254( = S

)1 - 100

254( = S72

= 98.7 mm

The net rainfall estimated from

0.8S + P

)0.2S - (P = r

2

d

7.98*44

7.98*2*22

0.8 +

)0.2 - ( = r

2

d

= 4.8 mm

The peak discharge then is

c

dp

tD

Ar = q

6.05.0

208.0

2*6.02*5.0

8.4*120*208.0

= q p

= 54 m3/s

Page 184: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

175

8.2. THE UNIT HYDROGRAPH METHOD

A unit hydrograph is a specific type of hydrograph in that it represents the effects

of the physical characteristics of the basin on the completely defined, standardized

input rainfall excess. The essence of the unit hydrograph is that since the physical

characteristics of the watershed shape, size, slope etc are relatively constant over

few years, one might expect considerable similarity in the shape of hydrographs

resulting from similar rainfall characteristics. It is called a unit hydrograph

because, for convenience, the runoff volume under the hydrograph is commonly

adjusted to 1 cm or 1 mm equivalent depth over the watershed. Formally we

define the unit hydrograph of a drainage basin (watershed) as a hydrograph of

direct runoff resulting from one centimeter of rainfall excess of a specified

duration generated uniformly over the watershed area at a uniform rate.

An important feature of the unit hydrograph is its specified time period. This is

the duration of rainfall excess that produce the unit hydrograph, and its duration

must be included in the name of the unit hydrograph. For a given basin a 1-hr unit

hydrograph will be different from the 3-hr unit hydrograph. A 1-hr unit

hydrograph is produced by 1 mm of rainfall excess falling over the basin in 1 hr at

a rate of 1 mm/hr, and a 3-hr unit hydrograph by 1 mm of rainfall excess

occurring uniformly during 1 3-hr period, at a rate of 1/3 mm/hr.

8.2.1 Derivation of unit hydrographs

The unit hydrograph is best derived from the hydrograph of a storm of reasonably

uniform intensity, duration of desired length, and a relatively large runoff volume.

In this section we discuss two methods of deriving a unit hydrograph from

observed rainfall and the resulting hydrograph of a given watershed.

Method one: simple proportioning of the direct runoff

The steps are:

1. Separate the base flow from direct runoff,

2. Determine the volume of direct runoff, and

3. Divide the ordinate of the direct runoff hydrograph by observed

runoff

depth.

Page 185: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

176

Example 8.3 Given the following hydrograph of a given watershed having drainage area

of 104 km2 derive the unit hydrograph for the watershed.

Solution: The direct runoff ordinates are obtained by subtracting the base flow from the

total streamflow, that Col. [3]- Col. [4]. Calculate the direct runoff depth

= 0.1170 m

= 11.70 cm

Then the unit hydrograph ordinate Col. [6] is obtained by dividing Col. [5] by 11.70 cm.

Note that it is informative to indicate the full unit of the unit hydrograph in this case

m3/s/cm.

Date Hour Total flow

(m3/s)

Base

flow (m

3/s)

Direct

stream flow qi

(m3/s)

Unit

hydrograph ordinate (m

3/s

/cm) [3] [4] [5] [6]

16-Feb 6000 11 8 3 0.0

8000 170 8 162 13.9

1000 260 6 254 21.7

1200 266 6 260 22.3

1400 226 8 218 18.7

1600 188 9 179 15.3

1800 157 11 146 12.5

2000 130 12 118 10.1

2200 108 14 94 8.0

2400 91 16 75 6.4

17-Feb 2000 76 17 59 5.1

4000 64 19 45 3.9

6000 54 21 33 2.8

8000 46 22 24 2.1

1000 38 24 14 1.2

1200 32 26 6 0.5

1400 27 27 0 0.0

1690

A

qt

r

n

i

i

d

1

610*104

1690*3600*2dr

Page 186: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

177

Method 2: Unit hydrograph derivation by convolution method

The process by which the design storm is combined with the transfer function

(that is the unit hydrograph) to produce the direct runoff hydrograph is called

convolution. Analytically speaking, convolution is referred to as theory of linear

superposition. Conceptually, it is a process of multiplication, translation with time

and addition.

The basic assumptions inherent in the convolution method are:

a. The excess rainfall has a constant intensity within the effective

duration. This implies that the storm selected for analysis should

be of short duration, since these will most likely produce an intense

and nearly constant excess rainfall rate, yielding a well-defined

single peaked hydrograph of short time base

b. The excess rainfall is uniformly distributed throughout the whole

drainage area. In this case drainage area should not be too large

(about 30 km2, max) and for large watershed, the area should be

subdivided and each sub-area analyzed for storms covering the

whole sub-area.

c. The base time of the direct runoff hydrograph resulting from an

excess rainfall of given duration is constant.

d. The ordinates of all direct runoff's of a common base time are

directly proportional to the total amount of direct runoff

represented by each hydrograph.

e. For a given watershed, the hydrograph resulting from a given

excess rainfall reflects the unchanging characteristics of the

watershed. So unit hydrographs are applicable incase of channel

and watershed physical conditions such as afforestation /

deforestation/ widening of channel remain unchanged and

watersheds do not have appreciable storage. For the changed

condition a new unit hydrograph should be produced.

The discrete convolution equation. The discrete convolution equation is given by

Page 187: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

178

Where: Qn = direct runoff (m3/s),

Rm = excess rainfall (mm),

U n-m-1 = the unit hydrograph ordinate (m3/s/mm),

M = the number of pulses of excess rainfall, and

N = the number of pulses of direct runoff in the storm

considered.

n = 1, 2, ..., N

m = 1, 2, ..., M

Note that the time interval used in defining the excess rainfall hyetograph

ordinates must be the same as that for which the unit hydrograph was specified.

Total number of discharge ordinate N derived from M excess rainfall pulses is

given by M + 1 + the number of unit hydrograph ordinates V. That is N =

M+1+V

Suppose that there are M pulses of excess rainfall and N pulses of direct runoff in

the storm considered, then N equations can be written for Qn, n = 1, 2, ..., N, in

terms of N - M +1 unknown values of the unit hydrograph. If Qn and Rm are

given and Un-m+1 is required, the set of equations is over determined, because

there are more equations N than unknowns N-M+1. Thus, unique solution is not

possible find.

Example 8.4: In a storm, the rainfall excess of 0.5 cm, 0.7 cm, 0.0 cm and 0.8 cm

occurred in four successive hours. The storm hydrograph due to this storm has the hourly

ordinates (m3/s)as given below: 0.5, 44.5, 110.5, 85.5, 102.8, 94.0, 38.4, 18.6, 10.9, 5.3,

2.9, 0.5. If there is a constant base flow of 0.5 m3/s, find the hourly ordinates of the unit

hydrograph.

Solution: The direct runoff ordinates Qn (m3/s) are 0.0, 44.0, 110.0, 85.0, 102.3,

93.5, 37.9, 18.1, 10.4, 4.8, 2.4, 0.0. The depth of effective rainfall are R1 = 0.5

cm, R2 = 0.7 cm, R3 = 0.0, and R4 = 0.8 cm.

Using equation (8.9)

UR = Q 1+m-nm

Mn

1=m

n

(8.9)

Page 188: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

179

The number of unit hydrographs ordinates to be found are = N-M+1 = 12-4+1= 9

Calculation fro

Q1 = R1U1 = 0.5 x U1= 0 m3/s, U1 = 0.0 m

3/s/cm

For the second time interval,

Q2 = R2U1 + R1U2 = 0.7 x 0.0 + 0.5 x U2 = 44.0 m3/s, U2 = 88.0 m3/s/cm

For the third time interval

Q3 = R3U1 + R2U2+ R1U3 =0.0 *0.05 + 0.70 *88.0 + 0.5 *U3 = 111.0 m3/s.

U3 = 96.8 m3/s/cm

Similarly the remaining ordinates are found U4 =34.5 m3/s/cm d as U5 =15.5

m3/s/cm, U6 =10.4 m

3/s/cm U7 =-33.0 m

3/s/cm U8 =0.0 m

3/s/cm U9 =0.0 m

3/s/cm.

Unit hydrograph application. Once the unit hydrograph has been determined it

can be applied to find the direct runoff and stream flow hydrographs using Eq.

(8.9).

where Qn = direct runoff (to be calculated),

Rm = excess rainfall (observed or design rainfall excess),

U n-m-1 = the unit hydrograph ordinate (already known),

M = the number of pulses of excess rainfall, and

N = the number of pulses of direct runoff in the storm

considered.

n = 1, 2, ..., N

m = 1, 2, ..., M

Example8.5 Calculate the streamflow hydrograph for a storm with rainfall excess of

nearly 0 cm in the first half hour, 4 cm in the second half-hour and 1 cm the third half-

hour. Use the half hour unit hydrograph ordinate given in column [3]. Asume the

UR = Q 1+m-nm

Mn

1=m

n

UR = Q 1+m-nm

Mn

1=m

n

Page 189: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

180

baseflow is constant at 20 m3/s throughout the flood. Calculate also the watershed area

from which this Unit hydrograph is derived.

Solution The calculation of the direct runoff hydrograph by convolution is shown in the

Table below.

The time interval is in t = 0.5 h intervals. For the first time interval, n =1 in the

equation

Q1 = R1U1 = 0.0 x 12.5 = 0 m3/s.

For the second time interval,

Q2 = R2U1 + R1U2 = 4.00 x 12.5 +0.0 x 16.25 = 50 m3/s.

For the third time interval

Q3 = R3U1 + R2U2+ R1U3 =1.00 *12.5 +4.00 *16.25 + 0.0 *48.12 = 77.5 m3/s.

and so on. In tabular form it is easily calculated by simply shifting one time step of the

resulting hydrograph from individual excess rainfall. see columns [4] , [5] and [6].

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

Time Excess

Rainfall (cm)

UH m3/s/cm hydrographs Base flow stream

flow

(o.5 hr) 0 cm ER 4cm ER 1cm ER (m3/s) (m3/s)

0*[3] 4*[3] 1*[3] [6]+[7]

1 0 12.50 0.00 20.00 20.00

2 4 16.25 0.00 50.00 20.00 70.00

3 1 48.12 0.00 65.00 12.50 20.00 97.50

4 58.07 0.00 192.48 16.25 20.00 228.73

5 14.02 0.00 232.28 48.12 20.00 300.40

6 19.16 0.00 56.08 58.07 20.00 134.15

7 0.00 76.64 14.02 20.00 110.66

8 0.00 0.00 19.16 20.00 39.16

20.00 20.00

The peak flow resulting from the storm was 300 m3/s and occurred at 2 hours. The

watershed area is calculated from the principle that the volume of the direct runoff under

the unit hydrograph is 1 cm in our case 1 cm, and it is 30 km2.

UR = Q 1+m-nm

Mn

1=m

n

Page 190: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

181

8.3 S- hydrograph

The S-hydrograph method allows the conversion of an X- hour unit hydrograph

into a Y-hour unit hydrograph, regardless of the ratio between X and Y. The

procedure consists of the following steps:

i. Determine the X hour S-hydrograph. Accumulating the unit hydrograph

ordinates at intervals equal to X, thus deriving the X-hour S-hydrograph.

ii. Lag the X -hour S-hydrograph by a time interval equal to Y hours.

iii. Subtract ordinates of these two S-hydrographs.

iv. Multiply the resulting hydrograph ordinates by X/Y to obtain the Y-hour

unit hydrograph.

v. The volume under X-hour and Y-hour unit hydrograph is the same. If Tb is

the time base of the X-hour unit hydrograph, the time base of the Y-hour

unit hydrograph is Tb - X + Y.

Example 8.6 Derive a 3-hr UH from 2-hr UH. The 2-hr UH is given in Columns

[1] and [2]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

Time (hr) 2-h 2-h lagged 3-hr UH

UH

(m3/s.cm)

SH

(m3/s.cm)

3h

(m3/s.cm)

[3]-[4]

(m3/s.cm)

[5]*2/3

(m3/s.cm)

0 0 0 0 0

1 50 50 50 33

2 150 150 150 100

3 300 350 0 350 233

4 600 750 50 700 467

5 750 1100 150 950 633

6 650 1400 350 1050 700

7 550 1650 750 900 600

8 450 1850 1100 750 500

9 350 2000 1400 600 400

10 250 2100 1650 450 300

11 150 2150 1850 300 200

12 50 2150 2000 150 100

13 0 2150 2100 50 33

14 0 2150 2150 0 0

sum = 4300 sum = 4300

Page 191: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

182

One-hour period ordinates of the 2 hr UH is read from the graph of the 2 hr UH Column

[2]. In calculating 2-h SH direct cumulative are not used, only sequential 2 hr cumulative

is considered.

8.4 Synthetic unit hydrograph

Where there are no streamflow data to develop unit hydrograph of a given

watershed by the foregoing methods, synthetic unit hydrograph method is utilized.

Synthetic unit hydrograph procedures are used to develop unit hydrographs for

other locations on the stream in the same watershed or for nearby watersheds of

similar physio-hydro-climatological characteristics. This section describes

Snyder’s synthetic unit hydrograph which is widely used in practice for un-

gauged watersheds.

Snyder found synthetic relations for some characteristics of a standard unit

hydrograph based on a study made mainly in the watersheds of the Appalachians

highlands, USA ranging from 30 to 30 000 km2. Five characteristics of a required

unit hydrograph for a given excess rainfall duration may be calculated:

i. the peak discharge per unit of watershed area qpR,

ii. the basin lag tpr (time difference between the centroid of the excess rainfall

hyetograph and the unit hydrograph peak),

iii. the base time tb, and

iv. the widths W (in time units) of the unit hydrograph at 50% and 75% of the

peak discharge.

Page 192: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

183

Figure 8.1 Snyder synthetic standard (a) and required (b) unit hydrographs.

Snyder defined a standard unit hydrograph as one whose rainfall duration tr is

related to the basin lag tp by

( 8.10)

For a standard unit hydrograph Snyder found the followings:

(Step 1) The basin lag is

(8.11)

Where:

tp = basin lag in hours

L = the length of the main stream in km from outlet to the

upstream divide

Lc = the distance in km from the outlet to a point on the stream nearest the

centroid of the watershed area.

C1 = 0.75

Ct = a coefficient derived from gauged watershed in the same region (0.3 to 0.6).

rp tt 5.5

`)( 3.0

1 ctp LLCCt

Page 193: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

184

Step (2) The peak discharge per unit drainage area in m3/s/cm/km

2 of the

standard unit hydrograph is

(8.12)

Where: C2 = 2.75

Cp = varies from 0.56 to 0.69

To compute Ct and Cp for a gauged watershed, the values of L and Lc are

measured from the basin map. From a derived unit hydrograph of the watershed

we obtain its effective duration tR in hours, its basin lag tpR in hours, and its peak

discharge per unit drainage area, qpR in m3/s/km

2.

If tpR = 5.5tR then tR = tr , tpR = tp and qpR = qp, and Ct and Cp are computed from

Eq. (8.11) and (8.12).

If tpR is quite different from 5.5tR, the standard basin lag is estimated by

(8.13)

Solve simultaneously for tr and tp, .then compute values of Ct and Cp with

qpR = qp and tpR = tp

Step (3) the relationship between, qp and the peak discharge per unit area qpR of

the required unit hydrograph is

(8.14)

(Step 4)

p

p

pt

CCq

2

rp

RrpRp

tt

tttt

5.5

4

pR

pp

pRt

tqq

pR

bq

t56.5

Page 194: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

185

(8.15)

(Step 5)

(8.16)

Where Cw = 1.22 for 75% of width

= 2.14 for 50% of width

Example 8.7 From its basin map of a given watershed, the following quantities are

measured: L = 150 km, Lc = 75 km, and watershed area = 3500 km2. From the unit

hydrograph derived for the watershed, the following are determined: tR = 12 hr, tpR = 34

hr, and qpR = 157.5 m3/s/cm. Determine the coefficients Ct and Cp.

Solution.

From the given data, 5.5tR = 66 hr, which is quite different from 34 hr. using Eq. (8.13)

And solving the above simultaneous equations we get: tr = 5.9 hr and tp = 32.5 hr.

Ct is calculated from

Ct = 2.65

The peak discharge per unit area for 1 cm depth of unit hydrograph is = 157.5/

3500 = 0.045 m3/s/cm/km

2. The coefficient Cp is calculated using

08.1 pRwqCW

rp

rp

tt

tt

5.5

4

1234

`)( 3.0

1 ctp LLCCt

`)75*150(75.05.32 3.0

tC

p

p

pt

CCq

2

Page 195: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

186

Example 8.8 Compute the six-hour synthetic unit hydrograph of a watershed having a

drainage area of 2500 km2 with L = 100 km and Lc = 50 km. This watershed has similar

pysio-climatic characteristics to the watershed of Example 8.7.

Solution.

The values of Ct and Cp determined above can also be used for this watershed.

For the six-hour unit hydrograph, tR = 6 hr, then tpR is calculated

Then qp in (m3/s/cm/km

2)

and

56.0

34

75.2045.0

p

p

C

C

`)( 3.0

1 ctp LLCCt

hrt

t

p

p

5.25

`)50*100(64.2*75.0 3.0

hrt

tp

r 64.45.5

5.25

5.5

hrt

t

tttt

pR

pR

RrppR

8.25

4

664.45.25

4

0604.05.25

56.0*75.2pq

0597.08.25/255*0604.0 pR

pp

pRt

tqq

Page 196: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

187

the peak discharge is qpr*A = 0.0597 * 2500 = 149.2 m3/s/cm.

The unit hydrograph coordinate then can be constructed based on the parameters that

derived above. The depth of the runoff under the unit hydrograph should be a unit.

hrqW

hrqW

pR

pR

9.440597.0*14.214.2

6.250597.0*22.122.1

08.108.1

50

08.108.1

75

hrq

tpR

b 930597.0

56.556.5

Page 197: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

188

8.5 Instantaneous Geomorphologic Unit Hydrograph

(8.17)

(8.19)

Page 198: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

189

(8.20)

(8.21)

Page 199: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

190

Page 200: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

191

8.6 Practice problems:

8.1 Determine (a) the design peak runoff rate, for a 50-year return period storm from

a 120 km2 watershed having IDF curve (I in mm/hr, T in years and tc in minutes) given by

78.0

18.0

)20(

500

ct

T = I

and with the following characteristics:

Subarea

(km2)

Topography

Slope (%)

Soil group Land use, treatment, and

hydrological condition

75 10-35 C Row crop, contoured, good 45 20-45 B Woodland, good

The maximum length of flow is 15 km and the difference in elevation along this path is

450 m.

8.2. A small rural watershed near Addis Ababa experienced 98 mm heavy storm in a

single day of early July. The watershed is covered by poor close-seed legumes 56%, poor pasture with grazing 25%, good fallow lands and 10 % and good wood lots 9%.

Hydrological soil groups respectively are B, A, B and C. Determine the direct runoff

from the 98 mm rainfall event

(a) by considering AMC I prevailed,

(b) by considering AMC III prevailed, and

(c) by considering AMC II prevailed.

8.3. A 15-minute unit hydrograph ordinates of a watershed are given in Table 1A.

The index of the watershed is 40 mm/hr.

(a) Determine the peak-flow that would result from a storm lasting 1.5 hours given in

Table 1B.

(b) Calculate the watershed area.

Table 1A: The unit hydrograph ordinates.

Time (min)

0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175

U(t)

m3/s/mm

0 85 145 234 126 78 48 0

Table 1B: rainfall data

Time (hr) 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5

Accumulated

rainfall (mm)

0.0 25 56 95

Page 201: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

192

8.4 In July 10, 2000 the following rainfall and the resulting streamflow were recorded at a gauging site of the watershed having drainage area of 195 km2 .

Time (hr)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

Accumulated

rainfall (mm)

20

45

78

Streamflow

(m3/s)

70

90

180

360

600

560

340

140

100

The base flow is 20 m3/sec.

In August 20, 2002 the following heavy rainfall were recorded over the watershed:

Time (hr)

1

2

3

Rainfall (mm)

19

36

40

(A) Estimate the peak flood caused by August 20, 2002 storm.

(B) If flooding at the gaging site occurs when the river stage is greater than 4 m, did the

August 20, 2002 rainfall cause flooding?

The gauging site has a rating equation defined by

where: Q in m3/sec, and H in m.

8.5 A watershed has a runoff coefficient of 0.4, area 350 ha. with general slope of 0.1 %

and maximum length of travel of overland flow of 2.5 km. Information on storm of 30

years return period is given as follows:

Duration (min) 15 30 45 60 80

Rainfall (mm) 40 60 75 100 120

Determine the size of the culvert that safely evacuates the 30-year flood from the watershed. Take an allowable velocity of 1.5 m/s through the culvert.

8.6. The following rainfall-runoff data were measured in an allowable velocity of 1.5 m/s through the culvert.

Rainfall P (cm) Runoff Qd (cm)

16.2 13.6

12.5 11.4 8.2 5.3

9.4 6.2

12.9 10.4

)0.2 + (H 80.0 = Q1.6

Page 202: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

193

Assuming that the data encompasses a wide range of antecedent moisture conditions, estimate the AMC II runoff curve number.

8.7. The following rainfall distribution was observed during a 6-hr storm

Time (hr) 0 - 2 2 - 4 4 - 6

Intensity (mm/hr) 10 15 12

The runoff curve number is CN = 76, calculate the ф index.

8.8 Given the following flood hydrograph and effective storm pattern, calculate the unit hydrograph ordinates of the watershed by the forward convolution equation.

Time (hr) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Flow (m3/s) 0 5 18 46 74 93 91 73 47 23 9 2 0

Time (hr) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Effective rainfall

(cm/hr) 0.5 0.8 1 0.7 0.5 0.2

Physiographic data on two nearly hydrological homogenous watersheds (1) and (2) are given below. Based on observed flood and the corresponding storm, a 3-hr unit

hydrograph was developed for watershed (1) and its peak discharge is 65 m3/s, the time

to peak from the beginning of the excess rainfall is 12 hr. Develop a unit hydrograph for

watershed (2).

Physiographic

characteristics

Watershed (1) Watershed (2)

L (Km) 40 60 Lca (km) 20 30

A (km2) 200 450

Page 203: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Hydrology of Midsize Watersheds

_______________________________________________________________________________

194

Page 204: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

River Routing

______________________________________________________________________________

195

9. River Routing

Flow routing is a mathematical procedure for predicting the changing magnitude,

speed, and shape of a flood wave as a function of time at one or more points along

a watercourse (waterway or channel). The watercourse may be a river, reservoir,

canal, drainage ditch, or storm sewer. The inflow hydrograph can result from

design rainfall, reservoir release (spillway, gate, and turbine release and / or dam

failures), and landslide into reservoirs.

River routing uses mathematical relations to calculate outflow from a river

channel given inflow, lateral contributions, and channel characteristics are known.

Channel reach refers to a specific length of river channel possessing certain

translation and storage properties.

The terms river routing and flood routing are often used interchangeably. This is

attributed to the fact that most stream channel-routing applications are in flood

flow analysis, flood control design or flood forecasting.

Two general approaches to river routing are recognized: (1) hydrologic and (2)

hydraulic. As will be discussed in Chapter 10, in the case of reservoir routing,

hydrologic river routing is based on the storage concept. Hydraulic river routing is

based on the principles of mass and momentum conservation. There are three

types of hydraulic routing techniques: (1) kinematics wave, (2) diffusion wave,

and (3) dynamic wave. The dynamic wave is the most complete model of

unsteady open channel flow, kinematics and diffusion waves are convenient and

practical approximations to the dynamic wave.

Hybrid model, possessing essential properties of the hydrologic routing and

hydraulic routing methods are being developed. The Muskingum-Cung method is

an example of a hybrid model.

This chapter discusses a commonly used hydrologic routing method such as the

Muskingum method.

Page 205: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

River Routing

______________________________________________________________________________

196

9.1 The Muskingum Method

The Muskingum method of flood routing was developed in the 1930s in

connection with the design of flood protection schemes in the Muskingum River

Basin, Ohio, USA. It is the most widely used method of hydrologic river routing,

with numerous applications throughout the world.

For a river channel reach where the water surface cannot be assumed horizontal,

in case of flood flow, the stored volume becomes a function of the stages at both

ends of the reach, and not at the downstream (outflow) end only.

In a typical reach, the different components of storage may be defined for a given

instant in time as shown in Figure 9.1.

I Q

Wedge storage

Prism storage

Fig. 9.1: River reach storages.

The continuity equation holds at any given time: dS/dt = I(t) - Q(t) where the total

storage S is the sum of prism storage and wedge storage. The prism storage Sp is

taken to be a direct function of the storage at the downstream end of the reach and

the prism storage is the function of the outflow Sp = f1(Q). The wedge storage Sw

exists because the inflow, I, differs from outflow Q and so may be assumed to be

a function of the difference between inflow and outflow Sw = f2(I - Q).

The total storage may be represented by:

S = f1(Q) + f2 (I - Q) ( 9.1)

with due regard paid to the sign of the f2 term.

Assuming that in Eq. (9.1) f1(Q) and f2 (I - Q) could be both a linear functions, i.e.

f1(Q) = KQ and f2 (I - Q) = b (I - Q), we have

Page 206: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

River Routing

______________________________________________________________________________

197

S = bI + (K-b)Q = K [(b/K) I + (1 -b/k)Q] (9.2)

and writing X = b/K, we get

S = K [XI + ( 1 - X) Q] (9.3)

X is a dimensionless weighting factor indicating the relative importance of I and

Q in determining the storage in the reach and also the length of the reach. The

value of X has limits of zero and 0.5, with typical values in the range 0.2 to 0.4.

Most streams have X values between 0.1 and 0.3. K has the dimension of time.

Note that when X = 0, there is no wedge storage and hence no backwater, this is

the case for a level-pool reservoir. The parameter K is the time of travel of the

flood wave through the channel reach and should have the same time unit as t ,

the time interval of the inflow hydrograph.

The routing equation for the Muskingum method is derived by combining Eq.

(9.1) and Eq. (9.3) and the result is given in Eq. (9.4). The condition is that C1 + C

2 + C3 = 1, and often the range for t is K/3 t . K.

Determination of K. If observed inflow and outflow hydrograph are available for

a river reach, the values of K and X can be determined. Assuming various values

of X and using known values of the inflow and outflow, successive values of the

numerator and denominator of the following expression can be computed:

t + X) - 2K(1

t - X) - 2K(1 = C

t + X) - 2K(1

2KX + t = C

t + X) - 2K(1

2KX - t = C

where

QC + IC + IC = Q

3

2

1

j3j21+j11+j

(9.4)

Page 207: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

River Routing

______________________________________________________________________________

198

The computed values of the numerator and denominator are plotted for each time

interval, with the numerator on the vertical axis and the denominator on the

horizontal axis. This usually produces a graph in the form of a loop. The value of

X that produces a loop closest to a single line is taken to be the correct value for

the reach, and K is equal to the slope of the line. Finally K may be computed form

the average value determined from Eq. (9.5) for the correct values of X. Note that

since K is the time required for the incremental flood wave to traverse the reach,

its value may also be estimated as the observed time of travel of peak flow

through the reach.

With K = t and X = 0.5, flow conditions are such that the outflow hydrograph

retains the same shape as the inflow hydrograph, but it is translated downstream a

time equal to K. For X = 0, Muskingum routing reduces to linear reservoir

routing.

As a guide K and X are chosen such that

One rule of thumb used in practice is that the ratio t/K be approximately 1 and X

be in the range 0 to 0.5 together with Eq. (9.6).

)Q- QX)( - (1 + )I - IX(

)]Q + Q( - )I + It[(0.5 = K

j1+jj1+j

j1+jj1+j (9.5)

5.01

XandXK

t0.5 X (9.6)

Page 208: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

River Routing

______________________________________________________________________________

199

Example 9.1: Given the inflow and outflow hydrograph in Table E9.1 from Cols.1 to 3.

Estimate the routing parameters K and X.

Solution: Channel storage is calculated by :

)]Q + Q( - )I + It[(0.5 S= Sj1+jj1+jjj 1

Several values of X are tried, within the range 0.0 to 0.5, for example, 0.1, 0.2, and 0.3.

For each trial value of X, the weighted flow (XIj + (1-X)Q j) are calculated, as shown in

Table E9.1. Calculating the slope of the storage vs. weighted outflow curve then solves

the value of K. In this case the value of K is 2 days for X =0.1. It is to be noted that there

is greater storage during the falling stage than during a rising stage of a flood for a given

discharge.

Table E9.1. Derivation of X in the Muskingum method, example 9.1

Page 209: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

River Routing

______________________________________________________________________________

200

Time Inflow Outflow Storage Weighted flow (m3/s)

(days) (m3/s) (m3/s) (m3/s).d X = 0.1 X=0.2 X = 0.3

0 352 352 0 0 0 0

1 587 383 102 403 424 444

2 1353 571 595 650 728 806

3 2725 1090 1803 1254 1417 1581

4 4408 2021 3814 2259 2498 2737

5 5987 3265 6369 3537 3809 4081

6 6704 4542 8812 4758 4974 5190

7 6951 5514 10611 5658 5801 5945

8 6839 6124 11687 6196 6267 6339

9 6207 6353 11972 6338 6323 6309

10 5346 6177 11483 6094 6011 5928

11 4560 5713 10491 5598 5482 5367

12 3861 5121 9285 4995 4869 4743

13 3007 4462 7928 4316 4171 4025

14 2358 3745 6507 3606 3467 3328

15 1779 3066 5170 2937 2809 2680

16 1405 2458 4000 2352 2247 2142

17 1123 1963 3054 1879 1795 1711

18 952 1576 2322 1513 1451 1389

19 730 1276 1737 1221 1167 1112

20 605 829 1352 807 784 762

21 514 1022 986 971 920 870

22 422 680 603 654 628 603

23 352 559 371 538 517 497

24 352 469 209 457 445 434

25 352 418 118 411 405 398

X = 0.1 X = 0.2 X = 0.3

y = 1.8386x

R2 = 0.9896

0

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

12000

14000

0 2000 4000 6000 8000

0

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

12000

14000

0 2000 4000 6000 8000

0

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

12000

14000

0 2000 4000 6000 8000

Where estimate of inflow and outflow hydrograph is not readily available

standard practice is to assume a value of 0.2 for X, with a smaller value for

Page 210: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

River Routing

______________________________________________________________________________

201

channel systems with large floodplains and larger values, near 0.4, for natural

channels. The following relationships for estimating K and X:

Where:

L = the reach length (m)

Vo = the average velocity (m/s)

yo = the full flow depth (m)

So = the slope of the channel bottom (m/m)

F = the Froud number V0 / [gyo] 2

Example 9.2: The flood hydrograph ordinates tabulated in Table E9.2 arrived at location

A (Figure E9.2) on 20 July 1999 at 1:00 p.m. Determine the peak flow and arrival time

(calendar day) of this flood at downstream location B. Muskingum coefficients of the

reach from A to B are: X = 0.35 and K = 1.2 days. The initial outflow at B was 10 m3/s.

A B

A B

Figure E9.2. Schematics of a river reach (From A to B)

Table E9.2: Flood hydrograph ordinates at Section A-A.

Time (hr)

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0

Inflow

(m3/s)

15 80 150 180 200 140 125 75 45 25

Solution:

The Muskingum coefficients are determined for X = 0.35 and K = 1.2 hr. The values are

C1 = 0.0625, C 2 = 0.7188, and C3 = 0.2188. Then the outflow is calculated in Table E 9.2,

oV

L K

6.0 (9.10)

LS

yFX

0

0

2

9

413.05.0

(9.6)

Page 211: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

River Routing

______________________________________________________________________________

202

and plotted in Figure E9.2. The arrival time of the peak flood at section B-B is at 20 July

1999 at 6:00 p.m.

Table E9.2 Calculation of Outflow hydrograph from inflow hydrograph

1 2 3 4 5 6

Routing Inflow Outflow

period j I Q

(hr) (m3/s) C1 I j+1 C2 I j C3 Q j (m3/s)

Initial condition 10 10

1 15 0.94 7.19 2.19 10.31

2 80 5.00 10.78 2.26 18.04

3 150 9.38 57.50 3.95 70.82

4 180 11.25 107.81 15.49 134.55

5 200 12.50 129.38 29.43 171.31

6 140 8.75 143.75 37.47 189.97

7 125 7.81 100.63 41.56 149.99

8 75 4.69 89.84 32.81 127.34

9 45 2.81 53.91 27.86 84.57

10 25 1.56 32.34 18.50 52.41

11 25 1.56 17.97 11.46 31.00

12 25 1.56 17.97 6.78 26.31

13 25 1.56 17.97 5.76 25.29

14 25 1.56 17.97 5.53 25.06

15 25 1.56 17.97 5.48 25.01

16 25 1.56 17.97 5.47 25.00

Figure E9.2. Inflow and outflow hydrograph.

0

50

100

150

200

250

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16Time (hr)

Q (

m3/s

)

Inflow hydrograph

Outflow hydrograph

Page 212: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

River Routing

______________________________________________________________________________

203

9.2 Practice problems

9.1. Given the following inflow and outflow hydrograph for a given reach, determine K

and X.

Time (hr) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Inflow (m3/s) 45 85 160 185 200 170 145 135 98 45 75

Outflow (m3/s) 45 50 75 88 145 160 175 145 78 56 40

9.2. Given the following inflow hydrograph to a certain stream channel reach,

calculate the outflow hydrograph by the Muskingum method.

Time (hr) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Inflow (m3/s) 35 75 88 125 185 140 120 98 78 35 30

and K = 1 hr, X = 0.2 and t = 1 hr.

9.3. A storm event occurred on a given catchment that produced a rainfall pattern of 5

cm/hr for the first 10 min, 10 cm/hr in the second 10 min, and 5 cm/hr in the next 10 min.

The catchment is divided into three sub-catchments.

A 1 C

B 2

The unit hydrograph of the three sub-catchments are given in the following table. Sub

basins A and B had a loss rate of 2.5 cm/hr for the first 10 min and 1.0 cm/hr thereafter.

Sub-basin C had a loss rate of 1.0 cm/hr for the first 10 min and 0 cm/hr thereafter.

Determine the resulting flood at point 2 given the Muskingum coefficients K = 20 min

and X = 0.2.

10 - minutes unit hydrographs

Sub-catchment A Sub-catchment B Sub-catchment C

Time (min) Q

(m3/s/cm)

Time (min) Q

(m3/s/cm)

Time (min) Q (m3/s/cm)

0 0 0 0 0 0

10 5 10 5 10 16

20 10 20 12 20 33

30 15 30 16 30 50

40 20 40 21 40 33

50 25 50 26 50 16

60 20 60 19 60 0

70 15 70 18

80 10 80 10

90 5 90 5

100 0 100 0

Page 213: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Reservoir Routing

___________________________________________________________________________

204

10. Reservoir Routing

Flood routing refers to the process of calculating the passage of a flood

hydrograph through a system. It is a procedure to determine the time and

magnitude of flow at a point on a downstream water course from known or

assumed hydrograph at one or more points upstream. If the system is reservoir

through which the flood is routed the term storage routing or reservoir routing is

used.

Reservoir routing method is used:

i. For flood forecasting in the lower parts of a river basin after passing

through reservoir, the case of Awash river downstream of Koka dam,

ii. For sizing spillways and determining dam / cofferdam height

iii. For conducting river basin watershed studies for watersheds where one or

more storage facilities exist. Specifically, for watersheds in which existing

reservoir are located, a reservoir routing is necessary to evaluate

watershed plans such as location of water supply structures, and regional

flood control measures.

Note that in order to develop an operational flood routing procedures for a major

river system, detailed knowledge of the main stream and the various feeder

channels is necessary.

In comparison to other hydrological problems, storage routing is relatively

complex. There are a number of variables involved, including (1) the input

(upstream) hydrograph; (2) the output (downstream) hydrograph; (3) the stage-

storage volume relationship measured from the site; (4) the energy loss (weir and

orifice) coefficients; (5) physical characteristics (e.g., weir length, diameter of the

riser pipe, length of the discharge pipe, etc.) of the outlet facility; (6) the storage

volume versus time relationship; (7) the depth-discharge relationship; and (8) the

target peak discharge allowed from the reservoir. The problem is further

complicated in that the inflow and outflow hydrographs can be from either storms

that have occurred (i.e., actually measured events) or design storm values.

Page 214: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Reservoir Routing

___________________________________________________________________________

205

10.1. Level pool or reservoir routing using storage indication or

modified pulse method

Level pool routing is the procedure for calculating the outflow hydrograph from a

reservoir with a horizontal water surface, given its inflow hydrograph and storage

outflow characteristics.

For a hydrological system, input I(t), output Q(t), and storage S(t) are related by

the continuity equation

The time horizon is broken into intervals of duration t, indexed by j, that is t = 0,

t, 2t, ..., j t, (j+1)t, ..., and the continuity equation is integrated over each time

interval. For the j-th time interval:

(10.2)

The inflow values at the beginning and end of the j-th time interval are Ij and I j+1,

and the corresponding values of the outflow are Q j and Q j+1. If the variation of

the inflow and outflow over the interval is approximately linear (for t small), the

change in storage over the interval Sj+1 - Sj can be found by rewriting the above

equation as

In order to solve the above equation let us separate group first the known (the

right quantity from the equality) and the unknown (the left one) variables in the

following equation:

Q(t) - I(t) = dt

dS (10.1)

t2

Q + Q - t

2

I + I = S- S

1+jj1+jj

j1+j (10.3)

Q(t)dt - I(t)dt = dS

t1)+(j

tj

t1)+(j

tj

S

S

1+j

j

Page 215: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Reservoir Routing

___________________________________________________________________________

206

The procedure then is first established storage-outflow relationship: 2S/t +Q and

Q based on the existing storage-water elevation and outflow-water elevation data,

physical characteristics of the reservoir.

The value of t is taken as the time interval of the inflow hydrograph. For a given

value of water surface elevation, the value of storage S and discharge Q are

determined, then the value of 2S/t +Q is calculated and plotted.

In routing the inflow through time interval j, all terms on the right side of Eq.

(10.4) are known, and so the values of 2S j+1 /t + Q j+1 can be computed. The

corresponding value of Q j+1 can be determined by linear interpolation of tabular

values.

To set up the data required for the next time interval, the value of 2Sj+1 / t - Q j+1

is calculated by

The computation is then repeated for subsequent routing periods.

Depth (stage) storage relationships for a given contour lines can be computed as follows.

The area within contour lines of the site can be planimetered, with the storage in any

depth increment Δh equal to the product of the average area and the depth increment.

Thus the storage increment ΔS is given by:

)Q - t

S2( + )I + I( = Q +

t

S2j

j

1+jj1+j

1+j

(10.4)

Q2 - )Q + t

S2( = )Q -

t

S2(

1+j1+j

1+j

1+j

1+j

(10.5)

hAAS ii )(*5.0 1 (10.6)

Page 216: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Reservoir Routing

___________________________________________________________________________

207

Figure 10.1 Development of the storage-outflow function for level pool routing on the

basis of storage-elevation and elevation-outflow curves.

0.0

100.0

200.0

300.0

400.0

500.0

600.0

700.0

800.0

0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5

H (m)

Q( m

3 /s)

0.0

1000.0

2000.0

3000.0

4000.0

5000.0

6000.0

0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5

H (m)

S(m

3)

0.0

100.0

200.0

300.0

400.0

500.0

600.0

700.0

800.0

0.0 500.0 1000.0 1500.0 2000.0 2500.0

2S/dt+Q (m3/s)

Q(

m3 /s

)

Page 217: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Reservoir Routing

___________________________________________________________________________

208

Example 10.1 . The design of an emergency spillway calls for a broad-crested weir of

width L = 10.0 m; rating coefficient Cd = 1.7; and exponent n = 1.5. The spillway crest is

at elevation 1070. Above this level, the reservoir walls can be considered to be vertical,

with a surface area pf 100 ha. The dam crest is at elevation 1076 m. Base flow is 17 m3/s,

and initially the reservoir level is at elevation 1071 m. Route the design hydrograph given

in Table E10.2 through the reservoir. What is the maximum pool elevation reached?

Solution. The calculation of the storage indication function above the spillway crest

elevation are shown in Table E10.1a. Outflow is calculated based on the Q = Cd L H n =

1.7 *10* H 1.5

.

The routing is summarized in Table E10.1b. The inflow hydrograph is given in Column 2

and 3. Columns 5 and 6 give calculated vale of 2Sj / t - Q j and 2Sj+1 / t + Q j+1. The

initial outflow is 17 m3/s; the initial storage indication value (when the reservoir water

level is 1 m above the spillway crest)

)Q - t

S2( + )I + I( = Q +

t

S2j

j

1+jj1+j

1+j

for j = 0 )Q - t

S2( + )I + I( = Q +

t

S20

0101

1

is = ( 17 +17 ) + 2*100000/3600 - 17 = 572.56 m3/s, with corresponding outflow of Q1 =

17 m3/s. For the next iteration for j = 1, we calculate Q2 - )Q +

t

S2( = )Q -

t

S2(

11

1

1

1

value based on the last estimated value, that is 2S1 / t - Q1 = 572.56 - 2*17 = 538.56

m3/s. Then

)Q - t

S2( + )I + I( = Q +

t

S2j

j

1+jj1+j

1+j

for j = 1 is )Q - t

S2( + )I + I( = Q +

t

S21

1212

2

= (17+20) + (538.56) = 575.56 m3/s.

The corresponding Q2 is then obtained from Table E10.1a as 17.4 m3/s. The recursive

procedure continues until iteration continues until the outflow has substantially reached

the base flow condition. The maximum pool elevation (MPE) occurs at maximum spill of

72.5 m3/s. It can be calculated from the ogee spillway equation and H = 2.63 m depth,

and the MPE is 1070.0 + 2.63 = 1072.63 m.

Page 218: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Reservoir Routing

___________________________________________________________________________

209

Table E10.1a Storage discharge relationship.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

Elevation

Head above

spillway

crest

Q

(outflow)

m3/s

S Storage

(m3)

2Sj+1/dt

+Qj+1

(m3/

s)

(m) (1070 m)

1070.0 0.0 0.0 0 0

1071.0 1.0 17.0 1000000 573

1072.0 2.0 48.1 2000000 1159

1073.0 3.0 88.3 3000000 1755

1074.0 4.0 136.0 4000000 2358

1075.0 5.0 190.1 5000000 2968

1076.0 6.0 249.8 6000000 3583

1077.0 7.0 314.8 7000000 4204

1078.0 8.0 384.7 8000000 4829

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

0 5 10 15 20 25

Time (hr)

Q (

m3/s

)

Inflow design Hydrograph

Outflow hydrograph over the spillway

Page 219: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Reservoir Routing

___________________________________________________________________________

210

Table E10.1b: Design hydrograph and reservoir routing calculation

Time Index Time

Design Inflow

hydrograph Ij +I j+1 2Sj/dt - Qj 2Sj+1/dt +Qj+1 Qj+1

j (hr) (m3/s) (m3/s) (m3/s) (m3/s) (m3/s)

1 0 17 34 538.6 572.6 17.0

2 1 20 37 538.6 575.6 17.4

3 2 50 70 540.7 610.7 19.0

4 3 100 150 572.7 722.7 24.3

5 4 130 230 674.1 904.1 33.7

6 5 150 280 836.7 1116.7 45.9

7 6 140 290 1024.8 1314.8 58.3

8 7 110 250 1198.2 1448.2 67.2

9 8 90 200 1313.9 1513.9 71.7

10 9 70 160 1370.5 1530.5 72.8

11 10 50 120 1384.9 1504.9 71.0

12 11 30 80 1362.8 1442.8 66.8

13 12 20 50 1309.2 1359.2 61.2

14 13 17 37 1236.8 1273.8 55.7

15 14 17 34 1162.4 1196.4 50.8

16 15 17 34 1094.8 1128.8 46.7

17 16 17 34 1035.5 1069.5 43.1

18 17 17 34 983.3 1017.3 40.1

19 18 17 34 937.2 971.2 37.4

20 19 17 34 896.3 930.3 35.2

21 20 17 34 860.0 894.0 33.2

22 21 17 34 827.6 861.6 31.4

23 22 17 34 798.8 832.8 29.9

Page 220: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Reservoir Routing

___________________________________________________________________________

211

10.1.2 Reservoir routing with controlled outflow

Most large reservoirs have some type of outflow control, wherein the amount of

outflow is regulated by gated spillways. In this case, both hydraulic conditions

and operational rules determine the prescribed outflow. Operational rules take

into accounts the various use of water.

The differential equation of storage can be used to route flows through reservoirs with

controlled outflow. In general, the outflow can be either (1) uncontrolled, (2) controlled

(gated), or (3) a combination of controlled and uncontrolled. The discretized equation,

including controlled outflow, is

in which Qr is the mean regulated outflow during the time interval t. With Qr

known, the solution proceeds in the same way as with the uncontrolled out flow

case.

In the case where the entire outflow is controlled, Eq. (10.6) reduces to

By which the storage volume can be updated based on average inflows and mean

regulated outflow.

Example 10.2 Discharge from a reservoir is over a spillway with discharge

characteristic:

Q = 120 H 1.5

Where: Q in m3/s and H is the head over the spillway (m).

The reservoir surface area is 12.5 km2

at spillway crest level and increases linearly by 2

km2 per meter rise of water level above crest level.

r

1+jj1+jjj1+jQ

2

Q + Q -

2

I + I =

t

S- S

(10.6)

r

1+jj

j1+j tQ - 2

I + It S= S (10.7)

Page 221: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Reservoir Routing

___________________________________________________________________________

212

The design storm inflow, assumed to start with the reservoir just full, is given by a

triangular hydrograph, base length 40 hr and a peak flow of 450 m3/s occurring after 18

hours after the start of flow. Estimate the peak outflow over the spillway and its time of

occurrence to start of inflow (adapted from Shaw, 1994).

Solution. A level water surface in the reservoir is assumed. Temporary storage above the

crest level is given by:

)()5.12(*10)0.25.12( 3

0

26

0

mHHdhh Adh= S

HH

Outflow over the crest are given by Q = 120H1.5

Taking the time interval of the inflow hydrograph 2 hr = 7200 s, we have

)Q - t

S2( + )I + I( = Q +

t

S2j

j

1+jj1+j

1+j

5.1

1

2

11

6 1207200/)5.12(*10*2

jjj1+j

1+jHHH = Q +

t

S2

5.1

1

2

1

1

1 1207.27734722

jjj1+j

1+jHHH = Q +

t

S2

and

5.1

1

2

11 1207.27734722

jjj1+j

1+jHHH = Q

t

S2

Now we need to derive the values of the above two functions.

Page 222: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Reservoir Routing

___________________________________________________________________________

213

10.2 Practice problems

10.1. Design the emergency spillway width (rectangular cross section) for the following

dam, reservoir, and flood conditions: dam crest elevation = 483 m; emergency spillway

crest elevation = 475 m, coefficient of spillway rating = 1.7; exponent of spillway rating

= 1.5. Elevation-storage relation:

Elevation (m) 475 477 479 481 483

Storage (hm3) 5.1 5.3 5.6 6.4 7.6

Inflow hydrograph to reservoir:

Time (hr) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Inflow

(m3/s)

0 10 30 50 60 150 250 350 280 210 190 170 130 100

Time (hr) 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Inflow

(m3/s)

90 75 50 40 30 15 10 5 2 1 0

Assume design freeboard = 3 m and initial reservoir pool level at spillway crest.

10.2 Solve Example 10.1 if the inflow hydrograph is changed to:

Time (min)

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

Inflow

(m3/s)

0.

0

2.7 4.4 6.9 8.7 9.4 15.1 19.6 20.9 10.7 8.6 5.5 4.4 2.1 1.5 0.

Page 223: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

214

11 Frequency Analysis

Extreme rainfall events and the resulting floods can take thousands of live and

cause billions of dollars in damage. Flood plain management and design of flood

control works, reservoirs, bridges, and other investigations need to reflect the

likelihood or probability of such events. Hydrological studies also need to address

the impact of unusually low rainfalls causing low stream flows which affects for

example water quality and water supply.

The term frequency analysis refers to the techniques whose objective is to analyze

the occurrence of hydrologic variable within statistical framework, by using

measured data and basing predictions on statistical laws.

Frequency analyses try to answer the following problems:

(1) Given n years of daily streamflow record for stream X, what is the

maximum (or minimum) flow Q that is likely to recur with a

frequency of once in T years on average?

(2) What is the return period associated with a maximum (or

minimum) flow Q. In more general term, the preceding questions

can be stated as follows: given n years of streamflow data for

stream X and L years design life of a certain structure, what is the

probability P of a discharge Q being exceeded at least once during

the design life L?.

Frequency analysis is made using appropriate probability distribution function to

the random variable under consideration. The next section briefly summarizes

probability distribution functions commonly used in hydrology.

11.1 Concepts of statistics and probability

Hydrological processes evolve in space and time in a manner that is partly

predictable, or deterministic and partly random, and such processes are called

stochastic processes. In this chapter, pure random processes are discussed using

statistical parameters and functions.

Page 224: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

215

Let X is a random variable that is described by a probability distribution function

and represent for example annual rainfall amount at a specified location. Let a set

of observations x1, x2, …, xn of this random variable sample be drawn from a

hypothetical infinite population possessing constant statistical properties that is

stationarity (having no significant trend and variation in variance).

Defining sample space as a set of all possible samples that could be drawn from

the population, and an event as a subset of the sample space; the probability of an

event A, P(A), is the chance that it will occur when an observation of the random

variable is made.

If a sample of n observation has nA values in the range of event A, then the

relative frequency of A is

and the P(A) is given by

The basic three probability laws are:

(1) Total probability law: If the sample space is completely divided into m

non overlapping areas or events A1, A2, …, Am then

P(A1) + P(A2) + …+ Am = P() = 1

(11.3)

(2) Complementarity: It follows that if A is the complement of A, that is A

=

- A, then

P(A) = 1 – P(A) (11.4)

(3) Conditional probability:

)1.11(/ nnf As

)2.11(/lim)( nnAP An

)5.11()(

)()/(

AP

BAPABP

Page 225: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

216

The above equation being read as P(B/A) the conditional probability that event B

will occur given that event A has already occurred is P(A B) the joint

probability that events A and B will both occur divided by P(A) the probability of

event A occurrence.

Example 11.1. The values of annual rainfall at Addis Ababa from 1900 to 1990 are

given in Table E11.1. Plot the time series and find the probability that the

annual rainfall R in any year is less than 1000 mm, greater than 1400 mm

and between 1000 and 1400.

Solution. The annual rainfall R at Addis Ababa over 90 years from 1900 to 1989 is

plotted in Figure E11.1. We see that there was extreme rainfalls in years 1947 (1939 mm)

and in year 1962 (903 mm).

Table E11.1: Annual rainfall amounts (mm) at Addis Ababa, Ethiopia, 1900 to 1989.

year 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980

0 1164 1270 1077 1460 937 946 1009 1423 1255

1 1241 1244 1041 1023 1105 935 1365 1175 1175

2 986 1162 1560 976 1154 1101 904 938 1209

3 1433 1175 1282 1181 1055 922 1015 1274 1192

4 1112 1439 1200 1027 1083 1199 1275 1192 1128

5 1101 1901 1179 1283 1006 1277 963 930 1190

6 1545 1729 1595 1419 1362 1025 1225 1124 1234

7 1047 1590 1271 1099 1939 1318 1167 1473 1212

8 1133 962 1343 1054 1313 1311 1102 1045 1203

9 1265 992 1245 1134 1354 1028 1328 1262 1324

There are n = 1989 – 1900 + 1 = 90 data points. Let A be the event R < 1000 mm, B is

the event R > 1400 mm. The number of events falling in these ranges are nA = 12, nB =

13.

So the P(A) 12 / 90 = 0.133

P(B) 13 / 90 = 0.144, and

P( 1000 < R < 1400) = 1 – P(A) – P(B)

= 1- 0.133 – 0.144 = 0.723 = 65/90.

Page 226: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

217

11.1.1 Frequency and probability functions.

Relative frequency function fs (x) is given by

The number of observations ni in interval I, covering the range [xi – x, xi].

Equation 11.6 is an estimate of P(xi – x, X xi), that is the probability that the

random variable X will lie in the interval [xi – x, xi].

Frequency histogram is used to display the distribution of frequencies over

selected intervals. For example, the frequency histogram for the rainfall at Addis

Ababa with x = 50 mm is given in Figure E11.2.

Time series of Addis Ababa rainfall (1900 - 1989)

500

700

900

1100

1300

1500

1700

1900

2100

1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000

year

annua

l ra

infa

ll a

mo

unts

(m

m)

)6.11(/)( nnxf iis

Page 227: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

218

Figure E11.1: Frequency histogram of the Addis Ababa annual rainfall (1900 - 1989)

Cumulative frequency function Fs(x) is given by

This is an estimate of P(X xi), that is the cumulative probability of xi.

Probability density function us defined as:

and the probability distribution function is defined as

and

Note that the relative frequency, cumulative frequency and probability

distribution functions are all dimensionless function varying over the range [0, 1].

0

5

10

15

20

25

30Absolute

frequency

< 949 950-

999

1000-

1049

1050-

1199

1200-

1349

1350-

1499

1500-

1649

1650-

1799

>

1800

Rainfall interval (mm)

)7.11()()(1

j

i

j

sis xfxF

)8.11()(

lim)(

0x

xfxf s

xn

)9.11()(

lim)(

0x

xFxF

xn

)10.11()(

)(dx

xdFxf

Page 228: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

219

However the probability density function f(x) has a dimension [x]–1

and varies

over the range [0, ) and has the property of:

a b x

Figure 11.2: A probability density function

One of the best-known probability density functions is that forming the familiar

bell-shaped curve for the normal distribution:

Where mean and standard deviation are the parameters of the normal

distribution.

Defining standardized normal variable z as

Then

)11.11(1)(

dxxf

f(x)

0)()(

)()()()(

d

d

b

a

dxxfaXP

aFbFdxxfbXaP

)12.11(]2

)(exp[

2

1)(

2

2

xxf

xz

Page 229: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

220

The standard normal probability distribution function is then

Example 11.2. The annual mean flows of a certain stream have been found to be

normally distributed with mean 90 m3/s and standard deviation 30 m

3/s.

Calculate the probability that a flow larger than 150 m3/s will occur.

Solution. Let X be the random variable describing annual mean flow of the river given

above. The standardized variable

z value for flow equal to 150 m3/s is (150-90)/30 = 2.00

x f(x)

-4.0 0.0001338

-3.5 0.0008727

-3.0 0.0044318

-2.5 0.0175283

-2.0 0.0539910

-1.5 0.1295176

-1.0 0.2419707

-0.5 0.3520653

0.0 0.3989423

0.5 0.3520653

1.0 0.2419707

1.5 0.1295176

2.0 0.0539910

2.5 0.0175283

3.0 0.0044318

3.5 0.0008727

4.0 0.0001338

normal density function

0.0000

0.1000

0.2000

0.3000

0.4000

0.5000

-6.00 -4.00 -2.00 0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00x

f(x)

)13.11(]2

exp[2

1)(

2

zz

zf

)14.11(]2

exp[2

1)(

2

z

duu

xF

30

90

xxz

Page 230: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

221

The required probability is that P(X > 150 m3/s) = P(z > 2.0)

It is known that P(z > 2.0) = 1- P(z < 2.0) = 1- F(2). = 1 – (0.5 + 0.4772) = 0.0228.

So the probability that a flow larger than 50 m3/s will occur is 0.0228.

11.3 Statistical parameters

The objective of statistics is to extract the essential information from a set of data.

Statistical parameters are characteristics of a population, such as and . A

statistical parameter is the expected value E of some function of a random

variable.

The sample mean is calculated from

The variability of data is measured by the variance 2 and is defined by:

The sample variance s2 is estimated by

Coefficient of variation CV is defined by

)15.11()()(

dxxxfXmeantheXE

x

)16.11(1

1

n

i

ixn

x

)18.11()(1

1 2

1

2 xxn

sn

i

i

)17.11()()())(( 222

dxxfxXE

Page 231: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

222

And sample CV is estimated by s /

The symmetry of a distribution about the mean is measured by the coefficient of

skewness :

Sample estimate

Example 11.3: Calculate the sample mean, sample standard deviation, and

sample coefficient of skewness of the Addis Ababa rainfall

given in Example 11.1.

Solution: Sample mean is calculated from Eq. (11.16)

Sample standard deviation is

Sample skewness is

)20.11()()(])[( 3

3

3

dxxfxXE

)19.11(

CV

)21.11()2)(1(

)(

3

1

3

snn

xxn

Cs

n

i

i

mmxxn

xi

i

n

i

i 120690

11 90

11

mmxxxn

si

i

n

i

i 203)1206(190

1)(

1

1 290

1

2

1

2

x

Page 232: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

223

11.4 Fitting data to a probability distribution

As discussed in the previous section, a probability distribution is a function

representing the probability of occurrences of a random variable. By fitting a

distribution to a set of hydrologic data, a great deal of the probabilistic

information in the sample can be compactly summarized in the function and its

associated parameters. Two methods can be used for fitting a probability

distribution: the first is the method of moment and the second is the method of

maximum likelihood.

The method of moment. The principle in the method of moment is to equate the

moments of the probability density function about the origin to the corresponding

moments of the sample data.

f(x)dx

x = moment arm

xi = moment arm

204.1203)290)(190(

)1206(90

)2)(1(

)(

3

90

1

3

3

1

3

i

i

n

i

i x

snn

xxn

Cs

f(x)

fs(x)=1/n

Page 233: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

224

Example11.4: The exponential distribution can be used to describe various kinds of

hydrologic data, such as the interval times between rainfall events. The

probability density function is given by

Determine the relationship between the parameter and the first moment about the origin

.

Solution:

The method of maximum likelihood. The central principle in the method of

maximum likelihood is that the best value of a parameter of a probability should

be that value which maximizes the likelihood or joint probability of occurrence of

the observed sample.

Let a sample of independent and identically distributed observations x1, x2, …, xn

of interval dx be taken. P(X= xi) = f(xi) = the value of the probability density for

X = xi if f(xi), and the probability that the random variable will occur in the

interval including xi is f(xi)dx. Since it is assumed that the observations are

independent, the joint probability of occurrence is simply the product of the

probability of the observations, thus the joint probability of occurrence is

(11.22)

The likelihood function L is given by

(11.23)

Or ln(L) is

(11.24)

xexf )(

xexXE x

1

)(0

n

i

n

i dxxf1

)]([

n

i ixfL1

)(

])(ln[)ln(1

n

i

ixfL

Page 234: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

225

Example 11.5: The following data are the observed times between rainfall events at a

given location. Assuming that the inter-arrival time of rainfall events follows an

exponential distribution; determine the parameter for this process by the method of

maximum likelihood. The time between rainfall events (days) are: 2.2, 1.5, 0.6, 3.4, 2.1,

1.3, 0.8, 0.5, 4.0, and 2.5.

Solution:

The log-likelihood function is

The maximum value of ln(L) occurs when

Thus

Testing goodness of fit. By comparing the theoretical and sample values of the

relative frequency or the accumulative frequency function, one can test the

goodness of fit of a probability distribution. In the case of the relative frequency

function, the 2 test is used. The sample value of the relative frequency of interval

i is calculated using Eq. (11.6)

and the theoretical value is estimated from

]ln[])(ln[)ln(11

n

i

xn

i

iiexfL

n

i

ii

n

i

xnx11

ln)(ln

0)(ln

L

)/1(89.1

11

0)(ln

1

hrx

xnL n

i

i

nnxf iis /)(

Page 235: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

226

The 2 test statistic is given by

(11.25)

Where m = the number of intervals.

To describe the 2 test, the

2 probability distribution must be defined. A

2

distribution with v degrees of freedom is the distribution for the sum of squares of

v independent normal random variables zi; this sum is the random variable

(11.26)

The 2 distribution function is tabulated in Annex 1. In the

2 test, v = m - p- 1,

where m is the number of intervals as before, and p is the number of parameters

used in fitting the proposed distribution. A confidence level is chosen for the test;

it is often expressed as 1 - , where is termed the significant level. A typical

value for the confidence level is 95 percent. The null hypothesis for the test is that

the proposed probability distribution fits the data adequately. This hypothesis is

rejected (i.e., the fit is deemed inadequate) if value of in Eq. (11.25) is larger

than a limiting value,

as determined from the 2 distribution with v degrees of freedom as the value

having cumulative probability 1 - .

11.5. Common probabilistic models

Many discrete probability mass functions and continuos probability density

functions are used in Hydrology. The most common are the binomial,

exponential, normal, gamma (Pearson Type 3), log-normal, log-gamma (log-

)()()( 1 iii xFxFxp

2

c

m

i i

iisc

xp

xpxfn

1

22

)(

)]()([

v

i

ivz

1

22

2

c

21, v

Page 236: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

227

Pearson Type III) and Gumbel (extreme value type I). A description of some

commonly used probability distribution in hydrology is given below.

11.5.1 The Binomial distribution

It is common to examine a sequence of independent events for which the outcome

of each can be either a success or a failure; e.g., either the T-yr flood occurs or it

does not. Such a sequence consists of Bernoulli trials, independent trials for which

the probability of success at each trial is a constant p. The binomial distribution

answers the question, what is the probability of exactly x successes in n Bernoulli

trials?

The probability that there will be x successes followed by n-x failures is just the

product of the probability of the n independent events: px

(1-p) n-x

. But this

represents just one possible sequence for x successes and n-x failures; all possible

sequences must be considered, including those in which the successes do not

occur consecutively. The number of possible ways (combinations) of choosing x

events out of n possible events is given by the binomial coefficient

(11.27)

Thus, the desired probability is the product of the probability of any one sequence

and the number of ways in which such a sequence can occur is

(11.28)

Where x = 0, 1, 2, 3, …, n.

The mean and the variance of x are given by

(11.29)

(1130)

)!(!

!

xnx

nn

x

xnx

n

x

ppxP

)1()(

)1()(

)(

pnpxVar

npxE

Page 237: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

228

The skewness is

(11.31)

Example 11.6: Consider the 50-yr flood, that is a flood having a return period of 50

years, T = 50 years, and then the probability of exceedence is given by P( the flood > x

value) = p = 1/T = 0.02.

(a) What is the probability that at least one 50-yr flood occur during the 30-yr

life time of a flood control project?

(b) What is the probability that the 100-yr flood will not occur in 10-yr? In 100

yr?

(c) In general what is the probability of having no floods greater than the T-yr

flood during a sequence of T yr?

Solution: (a) The probability of occurrence in any one year (event) is p = 1/T . The

probability (at least one occurrence in n events) is called the risk. Thus the risk is the sum

of the probabilities of 1 flood, 2 floods, 3 floods, …, n floods occurring during the n-yr

period. In other words, risk is 1- probability of no occurrence in n yr [1-P(0)].

Risk = 1 – P(0)

= 1- (1-p)n

= 1 – (1 – 1/T)n

Reliability = 1 - Risk

For the problem at hand, p = 1/T = 1/ 50 = 0.02

Risk = 1 – (1 – 1/T)n

= 1- (1 – 0.02)30

= 0.455

(b) Here p = 1/100 = 0.01, for n =10 yr, P(x =0) = 0.92. For n =100, P(x=0) =0.37.

(c) P (x =0) = (1 – 1/T)T

as T gets larger, P (x=0) approaches 1/e = 0.368. The Risk of

flooding in T –yrs is then 1- 0.368 = 2/3.

5.0)1(

21

pnp

pCs

0300

30

0

)1()1()0(

ppppP xnx

n

x

Page 238: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

229

Example 11.7: A cofferdam has been built to protect homes in a floodplain until a major

channel project can be completed. The cofferdam was built for the 20 –yr

flood event. The channel project will require 3-yr to complete. What are

the probabilities that:

(a) The cofferdam will not be overtopped during the 3 yr (the

reliability)?

(b) The cofferdam will be overtopped in any one year?

(c) The cofferdam will be overtopped exactly once in 3 yr?

(d) The cofferdam will be overtopped at least once in 3 yr (the risk)

(e) The cofferdam will be overtopped only in the third year?

Solution:

(a) Reliability = (1 – 1/T)n

= (1 – 1/20)3 = 0.86

(b) Prob = 1 /T = 0.05

(c)

(d) Risk = 1 – Reliability = 0.14

(e) Prob =(1-p)(1-p)p =0.95 2. (0.05) = 0.045

11.5.2 The exponential distribution:

Consider a process of random arrivals such that the arrivals (events) are

independent, the process is stationary, and it is not possible to have more than one

arrival at an instant in time. If the random variable t represents the inter-arrival

time (time between events), it is found to be exponentially distributed with

probability density function of

(11.32)

The mean and the variance of t:

(11.33)

(1134)

The skewness is 2.

135.0)1()1(,05.0 131

3

1

ppxPpfor

.0,)( tetf t

2/1)(

/1)(

tVar

tE

.0,1)( tetF t

Page 239: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

230

(11.35)

Example 11.8. During the course of a year, about 110 independent storm events occur at

a given location, and their average duration is 5.3 hours. Ignoring

seasonal variations, a year of 8760 hours, calculate the storm average

inter-arrival time. What is the probability that at least 4 days = 96 hr

elapse between storms? What is the probability that the separation

between two storms will be less than or equal to 12 hrs.

Solution: the average inter-event time is estimated by subtracting the total rainfall

periods from the total hours (rainy and non-rainy) and dividing by the number of rainfall

events.

The inter-event time = (8760 –110*5.3)/110 = 74.3 hr. and = 1/74.3 = 0.0135.

The probability that at least 4 days = 96 hr elapse between storms is Prob (t 96) = 1 – F

(96) = e(-0.0135*96)

.

The probability that the separation between two storms will be less than or equal to 12 hrs

is Prob (t < 12) = F (12) = 1- e(-0.0135*12)

. = 0.15

11.5.3 Extreme value distribution

Many time interests exist in extreme events such as the maximum peak discharge

of a stream or minimum daily flows. The extreme value of a set of random

variables is also a random variable. The probability distribution of this extreme

value random variable will in general depend on the sample size and the parent

distribution from which the sample was obtained.

The study of extreme hydrological events involves the selection of a sequence of

the largest or smallest observations from sets of data. For example, the study of

peak flows uses just the largest flow recorded each year at a gauging station - for

30 years of data only 30 points are selected.

Gumbel distribution: Extreme Value Type I

The extreme Value Type I (EVI) probability distribution is

(11.36)

xux

xF ))exp(exp()(

Page 240: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

231

The parameters are estimated by:

(11.37)

A reduced variate y can be defined as:

(11.38)

Substituting the reduced variate into Eq.(11.37) yields

F(x) = exp(-exp(-y)) (11.39)

Solving for y:

(11.40)

The return period and the cumulative probability function is related by

P(X xT) = 1/T

= 1- P(X < xT )

= 1- F(xT)

Also

F(xT) = (T-1)/T

And finally we get y in terms of return period for EVI distribution:

(11.41)

5772.0,6

xus

uxy

)(

1lnln

xFy

1lnln

T

TyT

Page 241: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

232

and related to xT by

xT = u + yT (11.42)

Heavy storm are most commonly modeled by the EVI distribution.

Example 11.9. Annual maximum values of 10-minutes-duration rainfall at Chicago,

Illinois, from 1913 to 1947 are given in Table E11.9. Develop a model

for storm rainfall frequency analysis using Extreme value Type I

distribution and calculate the 5-, 10-, and 50 – year return period

maximum values of 10-minute rainfall at Chicago.

Table E11.2. Annual maximum 10-minutes rainfall (mm) at Chicago, Illinois,

1913-1947

Year 10-min R (mm) Year 10-min R (mm)

1913 12 1930 8 1914 17 1931 24

1915 9 1932 24

1916 15 1933 20 1917 10 1934 16

1918 12 1935 18

1919 19 1936 28

1920 13 1937 16 1921 19 1938 13

1922 14 1939 16

1923 20 1940 9 1924 17 1941 18

1925 17 1942 14

1926 17 1943 23

1927 15 1944 17 1928 22 1945 17

1929 12 1946 16

1947 15

Solution: The sample moments calculated from the data in Table E11.2. The mean is

16.5 mm and the standard deviation is 4.5 mm.

The parameters of the EVI distribution is then:

4.145.3*5772.05.165772.0

5.35.466

xu

s

Page 242: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

233

The probability model is

To determine the values of xT for various of return period T, it is convenient to use the

reduced variate yT given by Eq. (11.41). For T = 5 years

And Eq. (11.42) yields

xT = u +yT

=14.4 + 3.5 x 1.500

= 19.6 mm.

By the same method, the 10-, and 50- year values are estimated to be 22.4 mm and 28.2

mm respectively.

It may be noted from the data in Table E11.2 that the 50-year return period rainfall was

equaled once in the 35 years data (in 1936), and that the 10-year return period rainfall

was exceeded four times during this period.

Extreme Value Type III (Weibull) distribution – Low flow analysis:

Weibull distribution has found greatest use in hydrology as the distribution of low

stream flows. It is defined as:

(11.43)

The cumulative Weibull, F(x), is given by

(11.44)

The mean and the variance of the distribution are:

.0,,0),))/()((exp()()()( 1 xxxxf

)))/()((exp(1)( xxF

xx

xF

xux

xF

0))5.3

4.14exp(exp()(

))exp(exp()(

500.115

5lnln

1lnln

T

TyT

Page 243: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

234

(11.45)

(11.46)

Where is a displacement parameter to create 0 as the lower bound of the

parameter x.

The estimate of the parameters is done using:

(11.47)

(11.48)

Where A() and B() is taken from Table 11.2.

Example 11.10: The minimum annual daily discharge on a stream are found to have an

average of 4.6 m3/s, a standard deviation of 1.8 m

3/s and a coefficient of

skew of 1.4. Evaluate the probability of the annual mean flow being less

than 3.69 m3/s.

Solution: Weibull distribution is used here for low flow analysis

Using estimated coefficient of skewness value = 1.4 , then the corresponding

parameters are read from Table 11.2.

1/ = 0.79, A() = 0.098, B() = 1.36

estimates of = 1.266,

)/11()()( XE

)]/11()/21([)()( 22 XVar

)( A

)( B

Page 244: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

235

Table 11.2. Values of A() and B()

(Skewness) 1/ A() B()

-1.000 0.02 0.446 40.005

-0.971 0.03 0.444 26.987

-0.917 0.04 0.442 20.481

-0.867 0.05 0.439 16.576

-0.638 0.10 0.425 8.737

-0.254 0.20 0.389 4.755

0.069 0.30 0.346 3.370

0.359 0.40 0.297 2.634

0.631 0.50 0.246 2.159

0.896 0.60 0.193 1.815

1.160 0.70 0.142 1.549

1.430 0.80 0.092 1.334

1.708 0.90 0.044 1.154

2.000 1.00 0.000 1.000

2.309 1.10 -0.040 0.867

2.640 1.20 -0.077 0.752

2.996 1.30 -0.109 0.652

3.382 1.40 -0.136 0.563

3.802 1.50 -0.160 0.486

4.262 1.60 -0.180 0.418

4.767 1.70 -0.196 0.359

5.323 1.80 -0.208 0.308

5.938 1.90 -0.217 0.263

6.619 2.00 -0.224 0.224

7.374 2.10 -0.227 0.190

8.214 2.20 -0.229 0.161

Prob (X 3.7) = F(3.7) is give by

= 0.368

11.5.4 Frequency Analysis using Frequency Factor

8.4)098.0(8.16.4)( A

4.2)36.1(8.18.4)( B

)))4.28.4/()4.27.3((exp(1)7.3( 266.1F

Page 245: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

236

Calculating the magnitude of extreme events by the method outlined in Example

11.9 requires that the probability distribution function be invertible, that is, for a

value for T or [F(xT) = T/(T-1)], the corresponding value of xT can be determined.

Some probability distribution functions are not readily invertible, including the

Normal and Pearson Type III distributions, and an alternative method of

calculating the magnitudes of extreme events is required for these distributions.

The magnitude of xT of a hydrological event may be expressed as:

(11.49)

which may be approximated by

(11.50)

in the event that the variable analyzed is y = log x, then the same method is

applied to the statistics for the logarithms of the data, using

(11.

51)

and the required value of xT is found by taking antilog of yT.

The Frequency factor for Normal Distribution

The frequency factor can be expressed from Eq. (11.50) as

(11.52)

This is the same as the standard normal variable z defined in this chapter.

The value of z corresponding to an exceedence probability of p = 1/T can be

calculated by finding the value of an intermediate variable w:

(11.53)

TT Kx

sKxx TT

sKyy TT

T

T

xK

)5.00(1

ln

5.0

2

p

pwT

Page 246: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

237

then calculating z using the approximation

(11.54)

When p > 0.5, 1-p is substituted for p in Eq. (11.53) and the value of z computed

by Eq.(11.54).

The Frequency factor for Extreme value distribution Type I (EVI)

For the EVI distribution the frequency factor is given by

(11.55)

Extreme value distribution Type II (EVII):

For the Extreme value distribution Type II (EVII) the logarithm of the variate

follows the EVI distribution. For this case Eq.(11.51) is used to calculate yT, using

the value of KT from Eq.(11.55).

Log-Pearson Type III distribution.

Log-Pearson Type III distribution the first step is to take the logarithms of the

hydrologic data, y = log x. Then the mean y, the standard deviation sy and

coefficient of skewness Cs are calculated for the logarithms of the data. The

frequency factor depends on the return period T and the coefficient of skewness

Cs. When Cs= 0, the frequency factor is equal to the standard normal variable z.

When Cs 0, KT is approximated by

(11.56)

where k = Cs/6.

The value of z for a given return period can be calculated using Eq.(11.53) &

(11.54).

32

2

001308.0189269.0432788.11

010328.0802853.0515517.2

www

wwwz

1lnln5772.0

6

T

TKT

5432232

3

1)1()6(

3

1)1( kzkkzkzzkzzKT

Page 247: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

238

Example11.11.The annual maximum daily discharge measured on the Beressa river at

Debere Birhan gauging site are given in Table E11.3. The Beresa river is

a tributary of Jemma River which is lying in Abay basin and has

watershed area of 220 km2 . Calculate the 5- and 50- year return period

annual maximum discharge of the Beressa river at Deberebirhan using

lognormal, EVI, and log-Pearson Type III distributions.

Table E11.3. Maximum daily discharge of the Beresa River (m3/s)

Year Q (m3/s) Year Q (m3/s)

1961 60.4 1980 84.4

1962 59.5 1981 missed

1963 82.5 1982 180.0

1964 90.0 1983 107.1

1965 32.8 1984 66.8

1966 75.0 1985 92.0

1967 58.0 1986 89.4

1968 112.5 1987 17.9

1969 151.4 1988 67.7

1970 80.7 1989 37.4

1971 144.0 1990 53.5

1972 63.1 1991 56.1

1973 81.3 1992 54.5

1974 163.0 1993 56.6

1975 83.7 1994 252.2

1976 140.0 1995 148.7

1977 58.0 1996 126.0

1978 74.5 1997 91.9

1979 101.0

Solution: Let X be the maximum annual discharge, then the mean x = 91.48 m3/s , the

standard deviation sx = 46.89 m3/s, and coefficient of skewness Cs = 1.4. For the log 10

data Y = Log(X), then the mean y = 1.91 m3/s , the standard deviation sy = 0.22 m

3/s,

and coefficient of skewness Cs = -0.3971.

Lognormal distribution.. The frequency factor can be obtained from Eq.(11.55). For T =

50 years, KT = 2.054

Then

x50 = 10 2.36

=229 m3/s

Similarly for T = 5 years, KT = 0.842.

sKyy TT

sm

y

/36.2

22.0*054.291.1

3

50

sKyy TT

Page 248: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

239

Then

x5 = 10 2.095

=124 m3/s

EVI distribution. The frequency factor can be obtained from Eq.(11.54). For T = 50

years, KT = 2.592

Then

Similarly for T = 5 years, KT = 0.719.

Then

Log-Pearson Type III distribution. For Cs = -0.3971, the value of K50 is obtained using

Eq. (11.56), K50 1.834,

x50 = 10 2.313

=205 m3/s

Similarly for T = 5 years, KT = 0.855, and x5 = 125 m3/s.

In summary:

Return period

5 years 50 years

Lognormal 124 229

EVI 125 213

Log-Pearson Type III 125 205

In this example the values of Beressa flood at Deberebirhan estimated by the

lognormal, EVI and log-pearson Type III distribution are very close to each other.

sm

y

/095.2

22.0*842.091.1

3

5

sm

x

/213

89.46*592.248.91

3

50

sKxx TT

sKxx TT

sm

x

/125

89.46*719.048.91

3

0

sKyy TT

313.2

22.0*834.191.150

y

Page 249: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

240

Commonly accepted practice first the data has to be fitted to candidate

distributions and select the model that describes the observed data very well and

apply the selected model in estimating the required flood of a given return period.

11.6 Probability plot

As a check that a probability distribution fit a set of hydrological data, the data

may be plotted on specially designed probability paper, or using a plotting scale

that linearizes the distribution function. The plotted data are then fitted with a

straight line for interpolation purposes.

Plotting position refers to the probability value assigned to each piece of data to

be plotted. Numerous methods have been proposed for the determination of

plotting positions. Most plotting position formulas are represented by :

(11.57)

Where m = is the rank 1 for the maximum, and n is for the minimum value

n = the number of data points used in the analysis.

b = 0.5 Hazen’s plotting position

b = 0.3 Chegodayev’s plotting position

b = 3/8 Blom’s plotting position

b = 1.3 Tukey’s plotting position

b = 0.44 Gringorten’s plotting position

Example 11.12. Considering that the probability distribution of the maximum flow of

the Berassa river used in Example 11.11 follows the Gumbel distribution,

plot the values on Gumbel paper.

Solution: The data is ranked first col [4], and the plotting position method is chosen, b =

0.4 Gringorten’s plotting position, and the return period is calculated for the data Col

[5]. Then the reduced variate yT for the Gumbel distribution is calculated for the T

associated

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

Year Flow Rank Flow Empirical Emprical

CDF

Gumbel distribution

T = (n+1-2a)/

(m-a) 1-1/T Reduced Predicted Observed

Tbn

bmxXP m

1

21)(

Page 250: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

241

variate

y

flow

Flow

1961 60.4 1 252.2 60.3 0.983 4.091 220.1 252.2

1962 59.5 2 180.0 22.6 0.956 3.097 183.7 180.0

1963 82.5 3 163.0 13.9 0.928 2.597 165.4 163.0

1964 90.0 4 151.4 10.1 0.901 2.256 153.0 151.4

1965 32.8 5 148.7 7.9 0.873 1.996 143.4 148.7

1966 75.0 6 144.0 6.5 0.845 1.783 135.7 144.0

1967 58.0 7 140.0 5.5 0.818 1.603 129.1 140.0

1968 112.5 8 126.0 4.8 0.790 1.445 123.3 126.0

1969 151.4 9 112.5 4.2 0.762 1.305 118.2 112.5

1970 80.7 10 107.1 3.8 0.735 1.177 113.5 107.1

1971 144.0 11 101.0 3.4 0.707 1.060 109.2 101.0

1972 63.1 12 92.0 3.1 0.680 0.951 105.2 92.0

1973 81.3 13 91.9 2.9 0.652 0.849 101.5 91.9

1974 163.0 14 90.0 2.7 0.624 0.753 97.9 90.0

1975 83.7 15 89.4 2.5 0.597 0.661 94.6 89.4

1976 140.0 16 84.4 2.3 0.569 0.573 91.4 84.4

1977 58.0 17 83.7 2.2 0.541 0.489 88.3 83.7

1978 74.5 18 82.5 2.1 0.514 0.407 85.3 82.5

1979 101.0 19 81.3 1.9 0.486 0.327 82.4 81.3

1980 84.4 20 80.7 1.8 0.459 0.249 79.5 80.7

1982 180.0 21 75.0 1.8 0.431 0.172 76.7 75.0

1983 107.1 22 74.5 1.7 0.403 0.096 73.9 74.5

1984 66.8 23 67.7 1.6 0.376 0.021 71.2 67.7

1985 92.0 24 66.8 1.5 0.348 -0.054 68.4 66.8

1986 89.4 25 63.1 1.5 0.320 -0.129 65.7 63.1

1987 17.9 26 60.4 1.4 0.293 -0.206 62.9 60.4

1988 67.7 27 59.5 1.4 0.265 -0.283 60.0 59.5

1989 37.4 28 58.0 1.3 0.238 -0.363 57.1 58.0

1990 53.5 29 58.0 1.3 0.210 -0.445 54.1 58.0

1991 56.1 30 56.6 1.2 0.182 -0.532 50.9 56.6

1992 54.5 31 56.1 1.2 0.155 -0.624 47.6 56.1

1993 56.6 32 54.5 1.1 0.127 -0.724 43.9 54.5

1994 252.2 33 53.5 1.1 0.099 -0.836 39.8 53.5

1995 148.7 34 37.4 1.1 0.072 -0.968 35.0 37.4

1996 126.0 35 32.8 1.0 0.044 -1.138 28.8 32.8

1997 91.9 36 17.9 1.0 0.017 -1.411 18.8 17.9

with the plotting position and the flow data col [7]. The Gumbel predicted flow is done in

Col. [8] using Eq.(11.42). Then plot the predicted col [8] and observed col [9] flows on

the Gumbel scale with x- axis being col [7]. It is seen that the data fits well the Gumbel

distribution except at the extreme value.

Page 251: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

242

11.7. Testing for outliers

Outliers are data points that depart significantly from the trend of the remaining

data. The retention and deletion of these outliers significantly affect the

magnitude of the statistical parameters computed from the data, especially small

sample size.

Water Resources Council (1981) recommends that if the station skew is greater

than +0.4, tests for high outliers are considered first; if the station skew is less

than –0.4, test for low outliers are considered first. Where the station skew is

between 0.4, test for both high and low outliers should be applied before

eliminating any outliers from the date set.

The following frequency equation can be used to detect high outliers:

(11.58)

Where; yH = the high (+) / low (-) outlier threshold in log units

Kn = values are Given in Table 11.3 for one sided test that detect

outlier at the 10-percent level of significance in normally

distributed data.

If the logarithms of the values in a sample are greater / less than yH in the above

ynH sKyy

0.0

50.0

100.0

150.0

200.0

250.0

300.0

-2.000 -1.500 -1.000 -0.500 0.000 0.500 1.000 1.500 2.000 2.500 3.000 3.500 4.000 4.500

Peak Q

(m

3/s

)

Gumbel reduced variate y

Gumbe Frequency Plot of Beresa River peak Flow

Page 252: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

243

equation, then they are considered high / low outlier.

Table 11.3 Outlier test Kn value

Sample size n

Kn Sample size n

Kn Sample size n

Kn Sample size n

Kn

10 2.036 24 2.467 38 2.661 60 2.837

11 2.088 25 2.486 39 2.671 65 2.866

12 2.134 26 2.502 40 2.682 70 2.893 13 2.175 27 2.519 41 2.692 75 2.917

14 2.213 28 2.534 42 2.700 80 2.940

15 2.247 29 2.549 43 2.710 85 2.961 16 2.279 30 2.563 44 2.719 90 2.981

17 2.309 31 2.577 45 2.727 95 3.000

18 2.335 32 2.591 46 2.736 100 3.017

19 2.361 33 2.604 47 2.744 110 3.049 20 2.385 34 2.616 48 2.753 120 3.078

21 2.408 35 2.628 49 2.760 130 3.104

22 2.429 36 2.639 50 2.768 140 3.129 23 2.448 37 2.650 55 2.804

Example 11.13. Check the data given in Example 11.11 for outliers?

Solution: The mean and standard deviation of log transformed peak flow with

sample size n = 36 are 1.9089 m3/s and 0.2217 m

3/s respectively. For n = 36 the

value of Kn = 2.639.

= 2.485 & 1.31933

Corresponding to Q = 305 m3/s and 21 m

3/s.

The maximum value is 257 m3/s and the minimum is 17 m

3/s. It is seen that low

outlier is found but it is very near to the boundary of 21 m3/s. So the data may be

acceptable in a sense that no outlier is found. However, one should check the

reason behind the low outlier, by comparing to the rainfall in the rainy months of

June, July, and August of the year 1987.

ynH sKyy

2217.0*639.29.1 Hy

Page 253: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

244

11.8 Practice problems

11.1 The values of annual rainfall at Addis Ababa from 1900 to 1990 are given in

Table Find the mean, standard deviation, coefficient of variation, and skewness

for two period: (a) for data from 1900 – 1945, and 1946 –1990. Fit the data using

normal distribution and check its goodness of fit over the two periods indicated.

Plot the data normal probability paper to check its fitness.

11.2 Fit the data of the peak flood of the Beresa river (given in Example 11.11) using

log-Pearson Type III distribution. Plot is in log-Pearson paper

11.3 The record of annual peak discharge at a stream gaging station is as follows:

year 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969

Q

(m3/s)

45.3 27.5 16.9 41.1 31.2 19.9 22.7 59.0 35.4

Determine using the lognormal distribution:

(a) The probability that an annual flood peak of 42.5 m3/s will not be exceeded.

(b) The return period of the dischrge of 42.5 m3/s

(c) The magnitude of a 20-year flood

Page 254: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Frequancy analysis

______________________________________________________________________________

245

Page 255: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 246.

_________________________________________________________________

12. BASICS OF GROUNDWATER HYDROLOGY

Our study of hydrology up to this point has concentrated on various aspects of

surface water processes, including rainfall, runoff, infiltration, evaporation,

channel flow, and storage in reservoirs. An engineering hydrologist also must be

able to address processes of groundwater hydrology and flow. This chapter

presents a concise treatment of groundwater topics following Bedeint & Huber

(1992), including properties of groundwater, groundwater flow and well

hydraulics. This represents a minimum coverage for the practicing hydrologist or

engineering student.

Groundwater hydrology is of great importance because of the use of aquifer

systems for water supply. Properties of the porous media and subsurface geology

govern both the rate and direction of groundwater flow in any aquifer system. The

injection or accidental spill of waste into an aquifer or the pumping of the aquifer

for water supply may alter the natural hydraulic flow patterns.

12.2 Properties of Groundwater

Groundwater can be characterized according to vertical distribution. Figure 12.1

indicates the divisions of subsurface the collection of groundwater data and

evaluation of these data in terms water. The soil water zone, which extends from

the ground surface down through the major root zone, varies with soil type and

vegetation. The amount of water present in the soil water zone depends primarily

on recent exposure to rainfall and infiltration. Hygroscopic water remains

adsorbed to the surface of soil grains, while gravitational water drains through the

soil under the influence of gravity. Capillary water is held by surface tension

forces just above the water table, which is defined as the level to which water rise

in a well drilled into the saturated zone.

The vadose zone extends from the lower edge of the soil water zone to the upper

limit of the capillary zone. Thickness may vary from zero for high water table

condition to more than 100 m in arid regions. Vadose zone water is held in place

12.1 Introduction

Page 256: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 247.

_________________________________________________________________

by hygrospcopic and capillary forces, and infiltration water passes downward

toward the water table as gravitational flow, subject to retardation by these forces.

Figure 12.1: Vertical zones of subsurface water

The capillary zone, or fringe, extends from the water table up to the limit of

capillary rise, which varies inversely with pore size of the soil and directely with

the surface tension. Capillary rise can range from 2.5 cm for fine gravel to more

than 200 cm for silt. Just above the water table almost all pores contain capillary

water, and the water content decreases with height depending on the type of soil,

A typical soil moisture curve is shown in Fig. 12.2.

In the zone of saturation, which occurs beneath the water table, the porosity is a

direct measure of the water contained per unit volume, expressed as the ratio of

the volume of voids to the total volume, Only a portion of the water can be

removed from the saturated zone by drainage or by pumping from a well.

Page 257: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 248.

_________________________________________________________________

Figure 12.2: Typical soil moisture relationship

A vertical hole dug into the earth penetrating an aquifer is referred to as a well

Wells are used for pumping, recharge, disposal, and water level observation.

Often the portion of the well hole that is open to the aquifer is screened to prevent

aquifer material from entering the well.

An aquifer can be defined as a formation that contains sufficient saturated

permeable material to yield significant quantities of water to wells and springs.

Aquifer are generally areally extensive and may be overlain or underlain by a

confining bed, defined as a relatively impermeable material. An aquiclude is a

relatively impermeable confining unit, such as clay, and an aquitard is a poorly

permeable stratum, such as a sandy clay unit, that may leak water to adjacent

aquifers.

Aquifers can be characterized by the porosity of a rock or soil, expressed as the

ratio of the volume of voids Vv to the total bulk volume (bulk volume includes

volume of solids plus pore space) V:

(12.1)

Where m is the density of the grains (normally assumed as 2.65 g/cm3) and b is

the bulk density, defined as the oven-dried mass of the sample divided by its

original volume. In soils containing a large percentage of clays (> 10 %) the clay

mineralogy or clay type has significant effect on soil water properties. For

m

bv

V

Vn

1

Page 258: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 249.

_________________________________________________________________

example expandable clay such as montmorillonite has a significantly lower

hydraulic conductivity and high water retention than non-expandable clays such

as kaolinite. Table 12.1 shows a range of porosities for a number of aquifer

materials.

Table 12.1: Representative values of Porosity (Maidement, 1996)

Sediment or rock type Porosity

Clays 0.40 – 0.60

Silts 0.35 – 0.50

Fine sands 0.20 – 0.45

Coarse sands 0.15 – 0.35

Shales (near-surface, weathered) 0.30 – 0.50

Shales (at depth) 0.01 – 0.10

Limestones 0.05 – 0.35

Bedded salt 0.001 – 0.005

Unfractured igneous rocks 0.0001 – 0.01

Fractured igneous rocks 0.01 – 0.10

Basalts 0.01 – 0.25

Unconsolidated geologic material are normally classified according to their size

and distribution. Soil classification based on particle size is shown in Figure 12.3

based on different current classification schemes. Partcile sizes are measured my

mechanically sieving grains larger than 0.05 mm and measuring rate of settlement

for smaller particles in suspension.

Figure 12.3: Triangular representation of soil textures for describing various

combinations of sand, silt and clay.

Page 259: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 250.

_________________________________________________________________

The texture of a soil is defined by the relative proportion of sand, silt and clay

present in the particles size analysis and can be expressed most easily on a

triangle of soil texture (Fig. 12.3):

Most aquifers can be considered as underground storage reservoirs that receive

recharge from rainfall or from an artificial source. Water flows out of aquifer due

to gravity or to pumping from wells. Aquifers may be classified as unconfined or

as confined, depending on the existence of a water table. A leaky confined aquifer

represents a stratum that allows water to flow through the confining zone.

.

Figure 12.4: Schematic cross section illustrating unconfined and confined aquifer

A perched water table is an example where unconfined water bodies sites on top of a clay

lens, separated from the main aquifer; a vertical cross-section illustrating unconfined and

confined aquifers. A confined aquifer is one in which water table exists and rises and falls

with changes in volume of water stored.

Confined aquifers, called artesian aquifers, occur where groundwater is confined

by a relatively impermeable stratum, or confining layer, and water is under

pressure greater than atmospheric. If a well penetrates such an aquifer, the water

level will rise above the bottom of the confining unit. If the water level rises

above the land surface, a flowing well or spring results and is referred as an

artesian well or spring.

A recharge area supplies water to confined aquifer, and such an aquifer can

convey water from the recharge area to locations of natural or artificial discharge.

The peizometric surface (or potentiometric surface) of a confined aquifer is the

Page 260: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 251.

_________________________________________________________________

hydrostatic level of water in the aquifer, defined by the water level that occurs in a

lined penetrating well.

Contour maps and profiles can be prepared of the water table for an unconfined

aquifer or the piezometric surface for confined aquifer called equipotential lines.

Once determined from a series of wells in an aquifer, orthogonal lines can be

drawn to indicate the general direction of groundwater flow, in the direction of

decreasing head.

12.3 Groundwater movement

12.3.1 Darcy’s law

The movement of groundwater is well established by hydraulic principles in 1856

by Henri Darcy, who investigated the flow of water through beds of permeable

sand. Darcy discovered one of the most important laws of hydrology – that the

flow rate through porous media is proportional to the head loss and inversely

proportional to the length of the flow path.

Figure 12.5 shows that the experimental setup for determining head-loss through

a sand column, with piezometers located a distance L apart.

Figure 12.5: Head loss through a sand column

Page 261: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 252.

_________________________________________________________________

Total energy of this system can be expressed by the Bernoulli equation

(12.2)

Where: p = pressure of water (N/m2)

= specific weight of water (N/m3)

v = velocity of flow in the medium (m/s)

z = elevation (m)

h1 = head loss (m)

Because velocities are very small in porous media, velocity heads may be

neglected, allowing head loss to be expressed:

(12.3)

Darcy related flow rate to head loss and length of column through a

proportionality constant K, the hydraulic conductivity, a measure of the

permeability of the porous media and is given by:

(12.4)

The negative sign indicates that flow of water is in the direction of decreasing

head.

The Darcy velocity that results from Eq.(12.4) is an average velocity through the

entire cross section of the column. The actual flow is limited to the pore space

only, so that the seepage velocity Vs is equal to the Darcy velocity divided by

porosity:

(11.5)

12

2

221

2

11

22hz

g

vpz

g

vp

2

21

11 z

pz

ph

dL

dhK

A

QV

n

V

nA

QVs

Page 262: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 253.

_________________________________________________________________

It should be pointed out that Darcy’s law applies to laminar flow in porous media,

and experiments indicate that Darcy’s law is valid for Reynolds number less than

1 and perhaps as high as 10. This represents an upper limit to the validity of

Darcy’s law, which turns out to be applicable in most groundwater systems.

Deviations can occur near pumped wells and in fractured aquifers systems with

large openings.

12.3.2 Hydraulic conductivity K

The hydraulic conductivity is a measure of the ability of a fluid to move through

the interconnected void spaces of sediment or rock. Hydraulic conductivity is a

function of both the medium and the fluid. To separate the effect of the medium

from those of the fluid, the permeability (k) is defined in the following expression:

(12.6)

Where = the dynamic viscosity of the fluid (kg/(m.s) or Pa.s)

= the fluid density (kg/m3)

k = intrinsic permeability (m2)

Table 12.2 gives representative values of hydraulic conductivity and permeability

for different sediment and rock types. The table identifies a commonly observed

range in hydraulic conductivity for each of the sediment and rock types. It does

not identify bounding values, nor does it differentiate between laboratory and in

situ measurements.

Table 12.2: representative values of hydraulic conductivity and permeability (Maidment,

1996)

Sediment or rock type Hydraulic conductivity

(m/day)

Permeability

(m2)

Clays 10-7 – 10

-3 10

-19 – 10

-15

Silts 10-4 – 10

0 10

-16 – 10

-12

Fine to coarse sand 10-2 – 10

3 10

-14 – 10

-9

Gravels 10 2 – 10

5 10

-10 – 10

-7

Shales (matrix) 10-8 – 10

-4 10

-20 – 10

-16

Shales (fractured and weathered) 10-4 – 10

-0 10

-16 – 10

-12

Sandstones (well cemented) 10-5 – 10

-2 10

-17 – 10

-14

Sandstones (friable) 10-3 – 10

-0 10

-15 – 10

-12

gkK

Page 263: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 254.

_________________________________________________________________

Salt 10-10

– 10-8

10-22

– 10-20

Anhydrite 10-7 – 10

-6 10

-19 – 10

-18

Unfractured igneous and metamorphic rock 10-9 – 10

-5 10

-21 – 10

-17

Fractured igneous and metamorphic rock 10-5 – 10

-1 10

-17 – 10

-13

Rock type

Cenozoic flood basalts:

Dense, unfractured 10-6 – 10

-3 10

-18 – 10

-15

Vesicular 10-4 – 10

-3 10

-16 – 10

-15

Interbeds 10-3 – 10

3 10

-15 – 10

-9

Quaternary basalts:

Vesicular 10 1 – 10

3 10

-11 – 10

-9

Tuffs:

Densely welded (matrix) < 10-6 < 10

-18

Densely welded (fractured) 10-6 – 10

1 10

-18 – 10

-11

Nonwelded 10-3 – 10

-2 10

-15 – 10

-14

A hydrologic unit is homogeneous if its hydraulic properties are the same at

every location. If the hydraulic conductivity of a sediment or rock is independent

of the direction of flow, the porous medium is isotropic. In this case fluid flow is

the same direction as the hydraulic gradient. If the value of hydraulic conductivity

of a sediment or rock is dependent of the direction of flow, the porous medium is

anisotropic. In an anisotropic medium, flow lines are not aligned with the

direction of the hydraulic gradient but instead are rotated toward the direction of

higher hydraulic conductivity. However, because of spatial and temporal

variability in the geologic processes that create and modify rocks and sediments,

no unit is truly homogeneous. Given the normal variation of hydraulic

conductivity measurements, question arises as to how best to average a set of

measurements to estimate a single value for the effective hydraulic conductivity

(Ke) when using a homogeneous medium approximation. For steady-state flow,

with a spatially uniform hydraulic conductivity, the following averaging rules

apply:

1. Perfectly stratifies medium, n layers, with layer thickness di and

hydaulic conductivity Ki:

When the flow is parallel to layering (arithmetic mean) horizontal

hydraulic conductivity

(12.7)

n

i i

i

ii

n

i

Ae

K

d

Kd

KK

1

1

Page 264: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 255.

_________________________________________________________________

Flow perpendicular to layering (harmonic mean) vertical hydraulic

conductivity:

(12.8)

In typical field situation in alluvial deposits, it is found that the hydraulic

conductivity in the vertical direction to be less than the value in the horizontal

direction. The ratios of horizontal hydraulic conductivity to vertical hydraulic

conductivity fall in the range of 2 to 10 for alluvium, with values upto 100 where

clay layers exists.

2. Heterogeneous medium, nonstratified, m measurements

Two-dimensional models (geometric mean)

(12.9)

Three-dimensional models

(12.10)

Where 2

y is the variance of the natural logarithms of the hydraulic conductivity

measurements.

If the hydraulic gradient is not constant, as in radial flow towards a pumping well,

no general averaging rules are available.

Variation of fluid density and viscosity with temperature can be estimated using:

n

i i

i

i

n

i

He

K

d

d

KK

1

1

m

mGe KKKKK /1

21 )....(

)6/1( 2

yGe KK

2

0

6

0

4 )(1056.2)(1017.31 TTxTTxow

Page 265: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 256.

_________________________________________________________________

(12.11)

(12.12)

Where: 0 = density of water at To = 20 0C which is 998.2 kg/m

3.

= dynamic viscosity (Pa. s) at To = 20 0C, = 1.005 x 10

-3 Pa.s.

If fluid density is a function of total dissolved solids (TDS), then

(12.13)

Where: C = concentration of TDS (g/L)

C0 = TDS in fresh water corresponding to 0 (g/L)

c = 7.14 x 10 –4 L/g within the salinity range from fresh water to

seawater.

12.3.3 Specific storage and specific yield

Specific storage

When fluid pressures decline within a porous medium, two responses occur:

(1) the fluid volume expands under the lower value of fluid pressure, and

(2) the pore space decreases as an additional fraction of the overburden

pressure must be carried by the solid matrix.

The magnitude of the first response is controlled by the compressibility of water

(), the magnitude of the second by the compressibility of the porous medium ().

The compressibility of a porous medium is defined as the ratio of the change in

volume (-V/V) to the change in effective stress (e), where e = - p. The

compressibility is the inverse of the bulk modulus.

15.133

37.248

5 101039.2 Tx

)(1 00 CCc

Page 266: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 257.

_________________________________________________________________

It is convenient to have a single parameter that characterizes the volume of water

released from a porous medium with a decline in fluid pressure. Specific storage

[L-1

] is defined as the volume of water that a unit volume of porous medium

releases from storage per unit change in hydraulic head. Specific storage is

calculated as:

(12.14)

Representative values of compressibility and specific storage are given in Table

12.3.

Table 12.3: Representative values of compressibility and specific storage.

Specific yield

Unconfined aquifers respond to groundwater withdrawals differently than

confined aquifers. Confined aquifers yield water to wells by the mechanisms of

fluid volume expansion and compaction of pore volume. By definition a confined

aquifer remains saturated. In addition to their elastic storage properties,

unconfined aquifers yield water by desaturation of the pore spaces as the water

table declines. Water released from unconfined aquifer greatly exceeds that of a

confined aquifer for equal water level declines. To reflect this difference, the

storativity of an unconfined aquifer is termed the specific yield, Sy, defined as the

volume of water released from a unit area of the aquifer for a unit decline in the

water table (Table 12.4). The specific yield is a significant fraction of the

effective porosity.

Table 12.4 gives representative values of the specific yield.

Sediment or rock type Specific yield, %

Sediment or Rock Type Compressibility

(Pa-1

)

Specific storage

Ss (m-1

)

Unconsolidated clays 10-6 – 10

-8 10

-2 – 10

-4

Unconsolidated sands 10-7 – 10

-9 10

-3 – 10

-5

Unconsolidated gravels 10-8 – 10

-10 10

-4 – 10

-6

Compacted sediment 10-9 – 10

-11 10

-5 – 10

-7

Igneous and metamorphic rocks 10-9 – 10

-11 10

-5 – 10

-7

Water 4.4x 10 -10

) ngSs

Page 267: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 258.

_________________________________________________________________

Clays 1 – 5

Silts 10 – 20

Fine sands 10 – 30

Sands and gravels 20 – 30

Sandstones 5 – 20

Shale 0.5 – 5

Limestone 0.5 – 20

One consequence of groundwater withdrawals in geologic settings that contain

compressible sediments is subsidence of the land surface (e.g., the Central Valley

of California and Mexico City). Most of the consolidation occurs not in the

aquifers but in the interstratified silts and clays that slowly releases water from

storage with the decline in hydraulic head. While subsidence can be arrested by

halting the decline in hydraulic head, because of inelastic nature of many clays,

subsidence is largely irreversible.

12.3.4 Transmissivity and storage coefficient.

In the case of horizontal flow through a layer of thickness b, two derived

parameters are commonly used. Transmissivity, T, [L2T

-1] is the product of

hydraulic conductivity and the layer thickness and storage coefficient S (or

storativity) is the product of specific storage and thickness.

(12.15)

(12.16)

It should be emphasized that S and T are specifically defined for two-dimensional,

horizontal analysis, having the aquifer thickness included within their values.

12.4. Determination of hydraulic conductivity in laboratory.

Hydraulic conductivity in saturated zones can be determined by a number of

techniques in the laboratory as well as in the field. Constant head and falling head

permeameters are used in the laboratory for measuring K. In the field, pump tests,

KbT

bSS s

Page 268: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 259.

_________________________________________________________________

slug tests, and tracer tests are available for determination of K. These tests are

described in more detail in the well hydraulics section.

A permeameter (Figure 12.8) is used in the laboratory to measure K by

maintaining flow through a small column of material and measuring flow rate and

head loss. For a constant head permeameter, Darcy’s law can be directly applied

to find K, where V is the volume flowing in time t through a sample of area A,

length L, and with constant head h:

(12.17)

Figure 12.8: Permeameter for measuring hydraulic conductivity of geologic samples. (a)

constant head. (b) Falling head.

Ath

VLK

Page 269: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 260.

_________________________________________________________________

The falling head permeameter test consists of measuring the rate of fall of the

water level in the tube or column and noting:

(12.18)

(12.19)

After equating and integrating,

(12.20)

Where L, r, and rc are shown in Figure 12.8 and t is the time interval for water to

fall from h1 to h2.

12.5. Flow nets

Darcy’s law was originally derived in one dimension. Many groundwater

problems, however, are really two- or three-dimensional. Flow rate and direction

need to be determined using flow nets which consists of a set of streamlines and

equipotential lines and boundary condition in two dimension.

Equipotential lines are prepared based on observed water levels in wells

penetrating an isotropic aquifer. Flow lines are then drawn orthogonally to

indicate the direction of flow. For the flow net of Fig 12.9, the hydraulic gradient i

is given by

(12.21)

and constant flow q per unit thickness between two adjacent flow lines is

dt

dhrQ 2

dl

dhKrQ c

2

2

1

2

2

lnh

h

tr

LrK

c

ds

dhi

dmds

dhKq

Page 270: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 261.

_________________________________________________________________

Figure 12.9: Typical flow net

If we assume ds = dm for a square net, then for n squares between two flow lines

over which total head is divided (h = H/n) and for m divided flow channels:

(12.22)

Where: K = hydraulic conductivity of the aquifer

m = the number of flow channels .

n = the num,ber of squares over the direction of flow

H = total head loss in direction of flow.

n

KmHmqQ

Page 271: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 262.

_________________________________________________________________

Since no flow can cross an impermeable boundary, streamlines must parallel it.

Also, streamlines are usually horizontal through high K material and vertical

through low K material because of refraction of lines across a boundary between

different K media following (see Figure 12.10):

(12.23)

Figure 12.10: Refraction of flow lines across a boundary between media of different

hydraulic conductivities.

Flow nets for seepage through a layered system may not be orthogonal and are

shown in Figure 12.1. Most of the flows is in the lower layer which has high K

(Fig 12.11(a).

2

1

2

1

tan

tan

K

K

Page 272: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 263.

_________________________________________________________________

Figure 12.11: Flow nets fort seepage from one side of a channel through two different

anisotropic two-layer systems. (a) Ku/KL = 1/50. (b) Ku/KL = 50. The anisotropic ratio for

all layers is Kx / Kz = 10.

Page 273: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 264.

_________________________________________________________________

12.6 Unconfined steady state flow: Depuit Assumption

For the case of unconfined groundwater flow, Dupuit developed a theory that

allows for a simple solution based on several important assumptions:

1. The water table or free surface is only slightly inclined.

2. Streamlines may be considered horizontal and equipotential lines

vertical

3. Slopes of the surface and hydraulic gradient are equal

Figure 12.12 shows the graphical example of Dupuit’s assumptions for essentially

one-dimensional flow. The free-surface from x = 0 to x = L can be derived by

considering Darcy’s law and the governing one-dimensional equation.

Figure 12.12: Steady flow in an unconfined aquifer between two water bodies with

vertical boundaries.

Example 12.1: Derive the equation of one-dimensional flow in an unconfined aquifer

with recharge rate of W, using the Dupuit assumptions and Figure E12.1.

Page 274: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 265.

_________________________________________________________________

Figure E12.1.

Solution

a) Designate recharge intensity as W, it can be seen that

From Darcy’s law for one-dimensional flow, the flow per unit width is

Substituting the second equation into the first yields

or

Wdx

dq

dx

dhKhq

Wdx

hdK

2

22

2

K

W

dx

hd 22

22

Page 275: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 266.

_________________________________________________________________

Integrating gives:

Where a and b are constants. The boundary condition h = ho at x =0 gives

b = ho2

and the boundary condition h = hL at x = L gives

Finally we get the Dupuit Parabola formulae:

Differentiation of the parabolic equation gives

But Darcy’s law gives

and

baxK

Wxh

22

K

WL

L

hha L

)( 2

0

2

)()( 2

0

2

2

0 xLK

Wxx

L

hhhh L

)2()(

22

0

2

xLK

W

L

hh

dx

dhh L

K

q

dx

dhh

)2()(

22

0

2

xLK

W

L

hh

K

q L

Page 276: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 267.

_________________________________________________________________

simplifying

Example 12.2: Two rivers located 1000 m apart fully penetrate an aquifer (Fig. E12.1).

The aquifer has a K value of 0.5 m/day. The region receives an average

rainfall of 15 cm/year and evaporation is about 10 cm/yr. Assume that

the water elevation in River 1 is 20 m and the water elevation in River 2

is 18 m. Using the equation derived in part (a) determine the location

and height of the water divide. (b) What is the daily discharge per m

width into each river?

Solution

The water divide is located at hmax, that is at x = d, where q = 0. Using L =1000, K = 0.5

m/day, h0 – 20 m, hL – 18 m, W = (15-10) = 5 cm/yr = 1.469x10-4 m/day:

At x = d, h = hmax

)2

()(2

22

0

LxWhh

L

Kq L

md

xxxd

hhLW

KLd

LdWhh

L

K

LxWhh

L

Kq

L

L

L

2.361

)1820(10369.110002

5.0

2

1000

)(22

)2

()(2

0

)2

()(2

22

4

22

0

22

0

22

0

.9.20

)2.3611000(5.0

2.361410369.12.361

1000

)2018(20

)()(

22

2

max

2

0

22

0max

m

xxh

xLK

Wxx

L

hhhh L

Page 277: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 268.

_________________________________________________________________

(b) For discharge into River 1, set x = 0 m:

The negative sign indicates that flow is in the opposite direction from the x-direction into

the River 1. Similarly for discharge into River 2, set x = L = 1000 m, and q = 0.08745

m2/day into River 2.

12.7 Steady-state well hydraulics

Steady radial flow to a well – confined aquifer

The drawdown curve or cone of depression varies with distance from a pumping

well in a confined aquifer (Fig. 12.13). The flow is assumed two-dimensional for

a completely penetrating well in a homogenous, isotropic aquifer of unlimited

extent. For horizontal flow, the above assumptions apply and Q at any r equals,

from Darcy’s law:

(12.24)

for steady radial flow to a well. Integrating after separation of variables, with h =

hw at r =rw at the well yields:

(12.25)

)2

()(2

22

0

LxWhh

L

Kq L

daymq

xx

q

/0495.0

)2/10000(10369.1)1820(10002

5.0

2

422

dr

dhrbKQ 2

)/ln(2

w

w

rr

hhKbQ

Page 278: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 269.

_________________________________________________________________

Figure 12.13: Radial flow to a well penetrating an extensive confined aquifer For steady

radial flow to a well.

Near the well the relationship holds and can be rearranged to yield an estimate for

transimissivity T:

(12.26)

by observing heads h1 and h2 at two adjacent observation wells located at r1 and

r2, respectively, from the pumping well. In practice, it is often necessary to use

unsteady-state analyses because of the long time required to reach steady state.

Steady radial flow to a well – unconfined aquifer

1

2

12

ln)(2 r

r

hh

QKbT

Page 279: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 270.

_________________________________________________________________

Applying Darcy’s law for radial flow in an unconfined, homogenous, isotropic,

and horizontal aquifer and using Dupuit’s assumptions (Figure 12.4)

(12.27)

Figure 12.14: Radial flow to a well penetrating an extensive unconfined aquifer For

steady radial flow to a well.

Integrating using the boundary condition specified in Fig. 12.14:

(12.28)

dr

dhrKhQ 2

1

2

2

1

2

2

lnr

r

hhKQ

Page 280: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 271.

_________________________________________________________________

Page 281: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 272.

_________________________________________________________________

Page 282: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 273.

_________________________________________________________________

Annex 1. Monthly Potential Evapotranspiration and Altitude relationship over

Ethiopia

Page 283: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 274.

_________________________________________________________________

Table 1. Tekeze and Mereb basins monthly potential evapotraspiration (PET) and altitude

relationships. Y = PET (mm/day), X = altitude (m).

Equation R2 t -value

Coeff. Cons.

January Y = - 0.0007 X + 5.3209 0.71 24.71 -6.21

February Y = - 0.0009 X + 6.2027 0.75 24.74 -6.40

March Y = - 0.0009 X + 6.8341 0.70 23.96 -5.77

April Y = - 0.0009 X + 7.319 0.68 22.68 -5.39

May Y = - 0.0007 X + 6.8455 0.64 23.72 -4.39

June Y = - 0.0007 X + 6.618 0.62 21.87 -4.27

July Y = - 0.8656 Ln(X) + 10.681 0.63 19.34 -4.29

August Y = - 0.5021 Ln(X) + 7.3998 0.65 21.92 -3.14

September Y = - 0.0005 X + 5.1666 0.60 23.87 -3.89

October Y = - 0.0007 X + 6.1164 0.76 24.89 -6.06

November Y = - 0.0008 X + 5.6512 0.89 38.61 -10.83

December Y = - 0.0008 X + 5.204 0.90 39.30 -10.86

Table 2. Awash and Rift Valley basins monthly potential evapotraspiration (PET) and

altitude relationships. Y = PET (mm/day), X = altitude (m).

Equation R2 t -value

Coeff. Cons.

January Y = - 0.0006 X + 4.8328 0.71 28.06 -5.48

February Y = - 0.0005 X + 5.1702 0.70 33.79 -5.75

March Y = - 0.0006 X + 5.5959 0.72 33.81 -6.46

April Y = - 0.0008 X + 5.7231 0.76 32.08 -7.58

May Y = 35.054 X - 0.286

0.73 23.09 -6.20

June Y = - 0.0023 X + 8.1067 0.72 13.95 -7.01

July Y = - 0.002 X + 6.8319 0.75 16.46 -7.90

August Y = - 0.0014 X + 5.8871 0.84 23.77 -10.14

September Y = - 0.0012 X + 5.7409 0.80 23.29 -8.85

October Y = 28.698 X - 0.2662 0.76 22.62 -5.65

November Y = 14.348 X - 0.1728 0.75 30.86 -5.42

December Y = - 0.0005 X + 4.8254 0.70 28.05 -5.53

Page 284: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 275.

_________________________________________________________________

Table 3. Abay basin except Dedisa and Dabus watersheds monthly potential

evapotraspiration (PET) and altitude relationships. Y = PET (mm/day), X =

altitude (m).

Equation R2 t -value

Coeff. Cons.

January Y = - 0.0007 X + 5.4389 0.64 14.88 -4.72

February Y = - 0.0008 X + 6.1292 0.56 12.73 -3.87

March Y = - 0.0010 X + 6.9370 0.61 12.18 -4.14

April Y = - 0.0012 X + 7.4885 0.69 13.45 -5.16

May Y = - 0.0008 X + 6.3138 0.69 15.60 -4.70

June Y = - 0.0006 X + 5.1495 0.76 16.57 -4.75

July Y = - 0.0006 X + 3.7716 0.79 18.91 -5.09

August Y = - 0.0001 X + 2.8461 0.70 37.73 -2.32

September Y = - 0.0006 X + 4.6550 0.59 13.57 -3.83

October Y = - 0.0008 X + 5.7701 0.72 15.30 -4.87

November Y = - 0.0009 X + 5.9514 0.61 10.60 -3.72

December Y = - 0.0006 X + 5.0342 0.77 15.09 -4.31

Table 4. Dedisa and Dabus watersheds (tributary of Abay basin) monthly potential

evapotraspiration (PET) and altitude relationships. Y = PET (mm/day), X =

altitude (m).

Equation R2 t -value

Coeff. Cons.

January Y = - 0.0005 X + 4.9403 0.45 12.23 -2.22

February Y = - 0.0006 X + 5.6164 0.54 15.39 -3.07

March Y = - 0.0006 X + 5.6967

0.82 30.32 -6.02

April Y = - 0.0008 X + 6.2272 0.48 11.39 -2.55

May Y = - 0.0006 X + 4.7427 0.55 13.91 -2.94

June Y = - 0.0008 X + 4.5708 0.62 11.14 -3.35

July Y = - 0.0006 X + 3.8977 0.76 18.14 -5.05

August Y = - 0.0002 X + 2.9166 0.81 46.07 -4.61

September Y = - 0.0003 X + 3.9142 0.66 22.58 -3.43

October Y = - 0.0005 X + 4.5854 0.59 16.72 -3.16

November Y = - 0.0007 X + 4.9180 0.58 12.33 -3.13

December Y = - 0.0006 X + 4.9761 0.68 17.08 -3.56

Page 285: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 276.

_________________________________________________________________

Table 5. Wabi Shebelle and Geneale Dawa basins monthly potential evapotraspiration

(PET) and altitude relationships. Y = PET (mm/day), X = altitude (m).

Equation R2 t - value

Coeff. Cons.

January Y = 20.324 X -0.2219

0.71 -6.17 23.14

February Y = 22.152 X -0.2261

0.75 -6.25 23.18

March Y = 25.49 X -0.2400

0.84 -9.08 31.42

April Y = -0.0007 X + 5.3951 0.77 -8.62 32.31

May Y = -0.0007 X + 5.3468 0.79 -8.82 30.67

June Y = -0.0009 X + 5.5797 0.77 -8.30 24.09

July Y = 48.563 X -0.3599

0.83 -11.49 28.74

August Y = 51.061 X -0.3622

0.82 -9.91 24.93

September Y = 53.177 X -0.3621

0.87 -10.17 25.64

October Y = -0.0007 X + 5.1307 0.80 -9.54 30.86

November Y = -0.0006 X + 5.081 0.74 -7.68 28.46

December Y = -0.0006 X + 5.054 0.74 -5.14 20.54

Table 6. Omo Gibe basin monthly potential evapotraspiration (PET) and altitude

relationships. Y = PET (mm/day), X = altitude (m).

Equation R2 t - value

Coeff. Cons.

January Y = - 0.0010 X + 5.4424 0.88 19.24 -4.78

February Y = - 0.0008 X + 5.3333 0.71 20.94 -5.70

March Y = - 0.0009 X + 5.5393 0.73 21.40 -6.32

April Y = - 0.0007 X + 5.0331 0.69 21.65 -5.53

May Y = - 0.0007 X + 4.5584

0.65 17.39 -4.93

June Y = - 0.0007 X + 4.1211 0.52 12.45 -3.73

July Y = - 0.0006 X + 3.6115 0.62 14.53 -4.79

August Y = - 0.0005 X + 3.2901 0.56 15.18 -4.21

September Y = - 0.0006 X + 3.9205 0.58 14.78 -4.03

October Y = - 0.0005 X + 4.1586 0.56 19.96 -4.67

November Y = - 0.0006 X + 4.4332 0.58 18.92 -4.38

December Y = - 0.0006 X + 4.5068 0.62 18.71 -4.78

Page 286: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 277.

_________________________________________________________________

Table 7. Baro Akobo basin monthly potential evapotraspiration (PET) and altitude

relationships. Y = PET (mm/day), X = altitude (m).

Equation R2 t -value

Coeff. Cons.

January Y = - 0.0010 X + 5.4424 0.88 35.79 -9.63

FebruarY Y = - 0.0009 X + 5.9371 0.80 33.68 -7.15

March Y = - 0.0006 X + 5.5812 0.80 43.64 -6.83

April Y = - 0.0006 X + 5.7733 0.67 30.85 -5.09

MaY Y = - 0.0005 X + 4.7500 0.71 37.81 -5.69

June Y = - 0.0004 X + 4.1620 0.65 35.01 -4.95

JulY Y = - 0.0005 X + 3.9859 0.82 40.60 -7.66

August Y = - 0.0002 X + 3.4565 0.48 39.53 -3.05

September Y = - 0.0005 X + 4.3136 0.83 46.16 -8.08

October Y = - 0.0006 X + 4.7104 0.88 55.32 -9.79

November Y = - 0.0008 X + 4.9346 0.94 59.99 -14.35

December Y = - 0.0009 X + 5.0132 0.89 41.74 -10.46

Page 287: Engineering Hydrology - FALMATASABA · PREFACE This teaching material has been compiled from lecture notes that I have given to the Civil Engineering undergraduate and postgraduate

Groundwater 278.

_________________________________________________________________

Chow, V.T. Maidment, D.R. and Mays, L.W. (1988) Applied Hydrology. McGraw-Hill.

Driscol, F.H. (1987) Groundwater and Wells. Johnson Division.

Linsely, R.K., Kohler, M.A. and Paulhus, J.L.H. (1958) Hydrology for Engineers.

McGraw-Hill.

Linsley R.K. & Franzini, J.B. (1979) Water Resources Engineering. McGraw-Hill.

Maidement, D.R. (Ed.) (1993) Hand Book of Hydrology, McGraw-Hill.

Mutreja, K.N. (1986) Applied Hydrology. Tata- McGraw-Hill.

Shaw, E. (1994). Hydrology In Practice. Chapman & Hall.

Todd, D.K.(1958) Groundwater Hydrology. John Wiley & Sons.

Ponce, V.M. (1989) Engineering Hydrology, Principles and Practices. Prentice Hall.

ERA (2002).